HomeMy WebLinkAboutB08-0010 Project Manual Volume II (pgs 1-230)• r
Landmark
610 West Lionshead Circle
Vail, Colorado 81657
Project Manual Vol. II
Building Permit Number B08 -0010
SAFEbuiltinc.
0 0
A. EPSTEIN AND SONS INTERNATIONAL
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
11
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
A. Description: Painting is indicated by Contract Documents and shall include work necessary and
incidental to completion and performance of the Work.
B. Included: Painting includes, but is not limited to, project site painting, coating and finishing of
outdoor and indoor exposed items and surfaces throughout the work, including following:
1. General:
a. Surface preparation, and priming and coats of paint in addition to surface pretreatments
and shop priming specified under other sections of Specification.
b. Touch -up painting.
c. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not painting or colors are indicated by Contract
Documents. Do not paint natural finish of material if specifically noted as a surface not to be
painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint these same as
adjacent similar materials or areas.
2. Mechanical: Painting of exposed, bare and covered pipes and ducts, and of hangers, exposed
steel work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under mechanical work; in
finished spaces, non - finished spaces and equipment type spaces, except as otherwise
0 '
required.
3. Electrical: Painting of exposed work and of hangers, exposed steel work, and primed metal
surfaces of equipment installed under electrical work; in finished spaces, non - finished spaces
and equipment type spaces, except as otherwise required.
C. Not Included: Following categories of work are not included as part of project site applied paint
work or are included in other sections of Specification. Such categories of work include, in
general, prefinished items, items in permanently concealed areas, finished metals, operating parts
and labels.
1. Shop Priming: Shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under various sections for
structural steel, miscellaneous metal, hollow metal work and similar items. Also, for fabricated
components such as architectural woodwork, and shop fabricated or factory built mechanical
and electrical equipment or accessories are included under other sections of Specification,
except as otherwise required.
2. Prefinished Items: Do not include painting when factory finishing or installer finishing is
required for such items as, but not limited to, metal, architectural woodwork, plastic laminate,
pre - finished partition systems, acoustic materials, toilet compartments, finished mechanical
equipment and finished electrical equipment, including light fixtures, switchgear and
distribution cabinets, except as otherwise required.
3. Concealed Surfaces: Painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in
concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, furred areas, pipe spaces and duct shafts,
except as otherwise required.
AESI 27210 PAINTING 09900 -1
18JAN08
`J
�W']
4. Finished Metal Surfaces: Metal surfaces of aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper,
bronze and similar materials shall not be finish painted, except as otherwise required.
5. Operating Parts: Operating parts and labels or moving parts of operating units, mechanical
and electrical parts, such as valve, damper operators, linkages, sinkages, sensing devices,
motors and fan shafts, shall not be finish painted, except as otherwise required.
6. Labels and Plates: Do not paint code and other regulatory required labels, such as
Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual and ASME, or any component or equipment
identification, performance rating, or name or nomenclature plates.
D. Paint Systems: Required paint systems include, but are not limited to, paint systems specified in
Part 2 of this Section.
E. Paint Schedule: Required types and applications of paint include, but are not limited to, paint
systems and application locations specified in Article - Paint Schedule, at end of this Section.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Coating: Same definition as indicated for paint.
B. Paint: Paint as used in this Section means painting or coating systems and products, including
primers, emulsions, enamels, polyurethanes, epoxies, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied
products whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats.
C. Overhead Expanses: Overhead surfaces of considerably large scale spaces, including decks,
beams, joists and like construction. Also include construction directly adjacent to such expanses,
such as piping, ducts, conduit, equipment, and hangers and supports, except as otherwise
indicated by Contract Documents.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of following, except to extent of most stringent
requirements of Contract Documents and of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on
performance of the Work:
1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
2. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications.
3. OSHA 29CFR1910 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards, for requirements relative to
personnel protection associated with permanent work, installation and operations.
4. PDCA - Painting and Decorating Craftman's Manual and Textbook.
5. PDCA - Painting and Decorating Encyclopedia.
6. PDCA P5 - Benchmark Sample Procedures for Paint and other Decorative Coating Systems.
7. SSPC PA 1 - Paint Application Specification No. 1, and Commentary on Paint Application.
8. USDOJ - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
9. Handicapped people accessibility codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on
performance of the Work.
B. Floor Slip Resistance: Meet requirements of Section 01415 - Performance Requirements.
C. Handicapped Accessibility: Meet requirements of Section 01415 - Performance Requirements.
AES127210 PAINTING 09900 -2
18JAN08
0
E
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Qualifications: Provide primer and other undercoat paints produced by same
manufacturer as finish coat of respective paint system. Insofar as possible, provide paint systems
and paint products for the work manufactured by one manufacturer. Use only thinners approved
by paint manufacturer, and use only within limits instructed and recommended by paint
manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Paint manufacturers shall have 5 years minimum certifiable
experience in manufacturing and in performance of respective paint product and associated paint
system.
C. Painter Qualifications: Applicator for painting work shall have 5 years minimum documented
experience in surface preparation and application of coating materials required for the work and
shall be approved by paint manufacturer for application of respective paint system. Upon request,
provide proof of qualifications.
D. Paint Coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Review
other sections of Specification in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of
total coating system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials proposed for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used.
E. Regulations: Verify that paint materials meet requirements of codes and regulations of public
authorities bearing on performance of the Work, including applicable life safety requirements,
such as contents of paint; flame spread, fuel contribution and smoke developed; VOC regulations,
and applicable health, environment, USDA and FDA regulations.
F. Pre - Painting Meeting:
1. General: Conduct a pre - painting meeting at project site prior to starting work at project site and
delivery of products to review conditions associated with performing work. Meeting shall
include review of construction conditions, substrate conditions, environmental requirements,
ambient conditions and coordination required for painting work. Meeting participants shall
include Architect, technical representatives of manufacturers, painter and installers of
substrate construction to receive paint. Record discussions of meeting, and agreements and
disagreements reached, and furnish a copy of record to each participant.
2. Minimum Agenda:
a. Establish and coordinate responsibilities to assure proper paint application.
b. Review color schedule, finish schedule and paint specifications applicable to paint types
and substrate surfaces. Resolve any conflicts.
c. Limitations imposed by environmental conditions, substrate conditions, deliveries,
scheduling and other like situations.
d. Establish areas on project site that will be available for material storage.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product specifications, technical data, including paint analysis, and
application instructions for each product. Include published data, certified conformance report or
certified laboratory test report of manufacturer substantiating each material meets requirements of
Contract Documents. Furnish certificates from state fire marshal or other applicable authority
AES1 27210 PAINTING 09900 -3
18JAN08
attesting paint meets applicable life safety requirements.
B. Paint Schedule: Submit schedule of proposed paint systems in same format as indicated in this
Section for respective paint system. Include complete description, identification and specifications
for each proposed paint system and paint product. See Article - Material Quality, of this Section.
1. Schedule detailing each substrate with specific product name and product number to be used
for each coat. Schedule shall use same substrate headings, appearing in same order
indicated in this Section.
2. Include dry film thickness, volume solids, VOC and units of sheen. If this information is not
included in schedule, then provide information in a letter of certification from manufacturer,
attach to schedule.
3. Include documentation that manufacturer has reviewed and approved each proposed painting
system.
C. Samples: Prior to beginning work, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be painted. Use
representative colors when preparing samples for review. Submit samples for review. Samples
will be reviewed only for visual characteristics, including color, finish, texture and sheen. Provide
a listing of material and application for each coat of each finish sample.
1. General: Submit 3 drawdowns of each product and color combination. Drawdowns shall be
applied using a 4 mil wet film thickness drawdown bar on Leneta Form WD half white and half
black coated cards, size 4" x 6" minimum. Label each card with project name, date, product
name and number, color number as stated in color schedule, and name, address and
telephone number of supplying facility. Resubmit until acceptable color and sheen is achieved.
2. Wood: On actual wood surfaces, provide two, 4" x 8" samples of each natural and stained
wood finish as required. Label and identify each as to location and application.
3. Concrete Unit Masonry: On concrete unit masonry, provide two, 4 inch square samples of
masonry for each type of finish and color, defining filler, prime and finish coat.
4. Actual Surfaces: On actual outdoor and indoor building surfaces and components to be
painted, duplicate painted finishes of prepared samples meeting requirements of PDCA P5.
On at least 100 square feet of surface as directed, provide full coat finish samples until
required sheen, color and texture is obtained. Provide finished lighting conditions for review of
painted surfaces.
5. Final Aesthetic Acceptance: Final acceptance of colors, sheens and textures will be from
sample areas with paint applied to actual building surfaces at project site.
1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Packaging: Deliver materials to project site in original, unopened packages and containers
bearing following information:
1. Name of manufacturer.
2. Name or title of material.
3. Stock number of manufacturer and date of manufacturer.
4. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
AES127210 PAINTING 09900 -4 1J
18JAN08
• s
B. Storage:
1. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in
storage of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Protect paint from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste
daily. Take all precautions to ensure adequate protection from fire hazards and health
hazards.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions:
1. Apply paint when surface and surrounding environmental conditions are within the limitations
specified by paint manufacturer.
2. Indoor painting shall not be performed in areas where dust is in air or may be generated
before paint can cure to a tack free state. Outdoor painting shall not be performed during dusty
and windy conditions.
1011111111KY[yttim
1. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or
to damp or wet surfaces, except as otherwise permitted by printed instructions of paint
manufacturer.
2. Painting may be continued during inclement weather only if areas and surfaces to be painted
are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
C. Lighting: Indoor work areas shall be illuminated during application of paint at same level
9 PP P , or
higher, as will be available at time of acceptance observation of the work.
D. Protection:
1. Store paint, solvents, thinners and associated materials in metal containers with tight fitting
covers.
2. Store used rags in covered metal containers. Used rags shall be removed from project site
premises at end of each work day.
3. During progress of work, remove discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and like items from
project site premises at end of each work day.
4. Do not allow smoking in storage spaces and while using or mixing paint and other combustible
materials.
5. Provide fire protection equipment at locations where painting is in progress, in accordance
with applicable codes, regulations and safety criteria.
6. Protect work adjacent to areas to be painted from paint damage. Provide drop cloths to protect
surfaces from paint droppings. Drop cloths shall be fire retardant and free of dust, lint and
excessive paint droppings.
E. Coordination: Coordinate painting with work of other trades in order to prevent recleaning and
touching up of previously applied paint.
AESI 27210 PAINTING 09900 -5
18JAN08
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. ICI Paints World Group.
B. Benjamin Moore & Co.
C. Pratt & Lambert, Inc.
D. The Sherwin Williams Company.
E. As indicated in Paint Systems, of this Section.
2.02 MATERIAL QUALITY
A. General: Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by
acceptable paint material manufacturers. Materials not displaying identification of manufacturer
as a standard, best grade product will not be acceptable.
B. Paint:
1. Proprietary names used by Contract Documents to designate products are not intended to
imply products of specified named manufacturers are required to exclusion of equivalent
products of other specified acceptable manufacturers. Specified products simplify description
and minimum requirements of type and quality of products required.
2. Contractor may submit products of other specified manufacturers for consideration of
Architect, but written acceptance is required.
a. Request for acceptance shall meet substitution provisions specified in Conditions of the
Contract and Section 01620 - Product Options, and in addition, shall be of same format as
indicated in this Section for respective paint system, accompanied with complete
identification and specifications of each proposed paint system and each paint product
meeting paint schedule requirements specified in Article - Submittals, of this Section.Each
paint system and product substitution shall be generic equivalent of same system and
product specified, meeting requirements and performance criteria specified in this Section.
b. Decision of Architect as to equality offered in lieu of specified items shall be final
C. Paint Performance: Performance criteria, including but not limited to, abrasion, adhesion,
hardness, salt spray (fog) and surface burning characteristics, of each paint or coating product
specified for respective paint system shall meet or exceed such performance criteria specified and
stated in current product data sheet of manufacturer for specific paint product specified as an
acceptable product under paint system.
D. Contents: Paints shall not contain carcinogenic materials, heavy metals and ingredients contrary
to codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. Also contents
shall not be detrimental to people.
E. Color Pigments: Pure, non - fading, applicable types to suit performance, service and substrates
required.
AESI 27210 PAINTING 09900 -6
18JAN08
0 •
F. Undercoat Paints: Provide primer and other undercoat paints produced by same manufacturer as
finish coat of respective paint system.
G. Thinners: Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended
limits.
2.03 COLORS AND FINISHES
A. General: Paint colors, surface treatments and finishes are indicated in Contract Documents.
B. Undercoat Colors: Each paint system undercoat shall be a different color shade to facilitate
identification of each coat.
C. Sample Finish Colors: Prior to beginning work, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be
painted. Match colors of sample color chips and submit samples as specified. Colors required
may not be standard colors of manufacturers specified.
D. Sheen: Generally, each following sheen shall be within respective specular gloss range when
measured by glossmeter with 60 degree geometry when evaluated meeting requirements of
ASTM D523:
1. Flat: Less than 10 percent.
2. Matte: 10 to 15 percent.
3. Eggshell: 16 to 30 percent.
4. Satin: 31 to 50 percent.
5. Semi - Gloss: 40 to 70 percent.
6. Gloss: More than 70 percent.
E. Schedule: Architect will furnish a paint schedule indicating color and sheen of paint for surfaces.
1. Color: Except as otherwise required by Contract Documents, provide two colors for each
room. Architect will select colors from standard colors of paint manufacturer available for paint
materials specified.
2. Sheen: Provide each finish coat with required sheen as defined in this Section.
2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS
A. Types: Provide paint systems required for various substrates as indicated in subsequent paint
system Articles.
B. Designations: Paint system designations indicated correspond to designations indicated by
Contract Documents.
C. Other Products: Where paint systems or paint products are proposed other than systems or
products specified by name and designation in Paint Schedule, provide submittal as required by
Article - Material Quality, of this Section.
I V ' AES127210 PAINTING 09900 -7
18JAN08
O Q
2.05 OUTDOOR PAINT SYSTEMS - CONCRETE (OPS -C)
A. Paint System OPS - C1 - Outdoor Concrete, Acrylic Elastomeric Emulsion - Normal:
1. Uses:
a. Concrete surfaces.
b. Include walls, overheads and like items.
c. Exclude concrete floors, walkways, working and like surfaces.
d. Concrete surfaces which are smooth and with minimum pinholes and like voids.
2. System:
a. Description: Modified acrylate elastomeric emulsion coating system, high solids content,
flexible and breathable film; abrasion, ultraviolet, water, alkali, mildew and blister resistant;
no surface filler, smooth or sand texture as required, matte sheen finish.
b. 1st Coat: Modified acrylate elastomeric emulsion, self - priming, 680 psi minimum tensile
strength, 47 percent minimum solids by volume, 1.2 Ibs/gal (143 g/L) maximum VOC
unthinned, 6.0 mils (150 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
c. 2nd Coat: Modified acrylate elastomeric emulsion, 680 psi minimum tensile strength, 47
percent minimum solids by volume, 1.2 Ibs/gal (143 g/L) maximum VOC unthinned, 6.0 mils
(150 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
3. Acceptable Products:
a. Tnemec Company, Inc.:
1) 1st Coat: Series 156 Enviro-Crete or Series 157 Enviro-Crete, to match 2nd Coat.
2) 2nd Coat: Series 156 Enviro-Crete for smooth texture or Series 157 Enviro-Crete for
sand texture.
2.06 OUTDOOR PAINT SYSTEMS - MASONRY (OPS -MA)
A. Paint System OPS -MA1 - Outdoor Concrete Unit Masonry, Acrylic Elastomeric Emulsion -
Normal:
1. Uses:
a. Standard face concrete unit masonry surfaces.
b. Operating surface temperature of 150 F maximum.
2. System:
a. Description: Modred acrylate elastomeric emulsion coating system, high solids content,
flexible and breathable film; abrasion, ultraviolet, water, alkali, mildew and blister resistant;
with surface filler, smooth or sand texture as required, matte sheen finish.
b. 1st Coat: Cementitious acrylic surface filler, 66 percent minimum solids by volume, 0.6
Ibs/gal (77 g/L) maximum VOC unthinned, complete coverage with pores filled and uniform
surface at 85 sf /gal (8.0 m2/gal) maximum application rate.
AESI 27210 PAINTING 09900 -8
18JAN08
•
c. 2nd Coat: Modred acrylate elastomeric emulsion, self- priming, 680 psi minimum tensile
strength, 47 percent minimum solids by volume, 1.2 Ibstgal (143 g/L) maximum VOC
unthinned, 6.0 mils (150 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
d. 3rd Coat: Modified acrylate elastomeric emulsion, 680 psi minimum tensile strength, 47
percent minimum solids by volume, 1.2 Ibstgal (143 g/L) maximum VOC unthinned, 6.0 mils
(150 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
3. Acceptable Products:
a. Tnemec Company, Inc.:
1) 1st Coat: Series 130 Envirofil.
2) 2nd Coat: Series 156 Enviro -Crete or Series 157 Enviro-Crete, to match 3rd Coat.
3) 3rd Coat: Series 156 Enviro-Crete for smooth texture or Series 157 Enviro-Crete for
sand texture.
B. Paint System OPS - ME5 - Outdoor Metal, Polyurethane System:
1. Uses:
a. Ferrous metal, zinc coated metal (galvanized, or inorganic or organic zinc rich primed) and
non-ferrous metal surfaces.
b. Include structural steel, steel deck, miscellaneous metal fabrications, overhead door
frames, pipe guards (bollards), handrails and railings, hollow metal items; non - insulated
piping, ducts and equipment; conduit and like items.
c. Operating surface temperature of 150 F maximum.
2. System:
a. Description: Aliphatic acrylic polyurethane coating system, two component, high solids
content; abrasion, chemical and water resistant; non - immersion service, meeting USDA
and FDA acceptability regulations; eggshell, semi -gloss or gloss sheen finish as required.
b. 1st Coat: Polyamide epoxy, self - priming, 56 percent minimum solids by volume, 3.1 Ibs/gal
(375 g/L) maximum VOC unthinned, 5.0 mils (125 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
Coat required on items with bare surfaces or with previously prime painted surfaces not
coated with this 1 st Coat coating material.
c. 2nd Coat: Aliphatic acrylic polyurethane, 68 percent minimum solids by volume, 2.4 Ibstgal
(290 g/L) maximum VOC unthinned, 2.5 mils (65 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
Polyurethane shall not contain modified alkyd resin binder.
d. 3rd Coat: Aliphatic acrylic polyurethane enamel, 68 percent minimum solids by volume, 2.4
Ibstgal (290 g/L) maximum VOC unthinned, 2.5 mils (65 microns) minimum dry film
thickness. Polyurethane shall not contain modified alkyd resin binder.
AESI 27210 PAINTING 09900 -9
18JAN08
3. Acceptable Products:
a. Tnemec Company, Inc.:
1) 1st Coat: Series 27 F.C. Typoxy.
2) 2nd Coat: Series 175 Endura - Shield, Series 75 Endura- Shield or Series 74 Endura -
Shield, to match 3rd Coat.
3) 3rd Coat: Series 175 Endura - Shield for eggshell sheen, Series 75 Endura - Shield for
semi -gloss sheen or Series 74 Endura - Shield for gloss sheen.
2.07 OUTDOOR PAINT SYSTEMS - PLASTER (OPS -P)
A. Paint System OPS -P1 - Outdoor Portland Cement Plaster, Acrylic Emulsion:
1. Uses:
a. Portland cement plaster surfaces.
b. Include ceilings, soffits and like items.
2. System:
a. Description: Acrylic emulsion coating system; alkali, mildew and blister resistant; no surface
filler, meeting USDA and FDA acceptability regulations, low gloss or semi -gloss sheen
finish as required.
b. 1st Coat: Acrylic emulsion, self- priming, 41 percent minimum solids by volume, 1.9 Ibstgal
(224 g/L) maximum VOC, 2.5 mils (65 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
c. 2nd Coat: Acrylic emulsion, 41 percent minimum solids by volume, 1.9 Ibstgal maximum
VOC, 2.5 mils (65 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
3. Acceptable Products:
a. Tnemec Company, Inc.:
1) 1st Coat: Series 6 Tneme -Cryl.
2) 2nd Coat: Series 6 Tneme -Cryl for low gloss sheen or Series 7 Tneme -Cryl SG for
semi -gloss sheen.
2.08 OUTDOOR PAINT SYSTEMS - GYPSUM BOARD (GB)
A. Paint System OPS -GB1 - Outdoor Gypsum Board, Acrylic Emulsion:
1. Uses:
a. Gypsum board surfaces.
b. Include ceilings, soffits and like items.
AESI 27210 PAINTING 09900 -10
18JAN08
7
2. System:
a. Description: Acrylic emulsion coating system; alkali, mildew and blister resistant; no surface
filler, meeting USDA and FDA acceptability regulations, low gloss or semi -gloss sheen
finish as required.
b. 1st Coat: Acrylic emulsion, self - priming, 41 percent minimum solids by volume, 1.9 lbs/gal
(224 g/L) maximum VOC, 2.5 mils (65 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
c. 2nd Coat: Acrylic emulsion, 41 percent minimum solids by volume, 1.9 Ibs/gal (224 g/L)
maximum VOC, 2.5 mils (65 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
3. Acceptable Products:
a. Tnemec Company, Inc.:
1) 1st Coat: Series 6 Tneme -Cryl.
2) 2nd Coat: Series 6 Tneme -Cryl for low gloss sheen or Series 7 Tneme -Cryl SG for
semi -gloss sheen.
D
2.09 INDOOR PAINT SYSTEMS - CONCRETE (IPS -C)
A. Paint System IPS -C2A - Indoor Concrete, Acrylic Emulsion, Occupied Spaces:
1. Uses:
a. Concrete surfaces, two coat application and dry-fall performance dependent on work and
environmental conditions.
b. Concrete surfaces of commercial and residential spaces.
c. Include wall, concrete column, beam, ceiling and like surfaces.
d. Include concrete unit masonry, whether pores are filled or non - filled.
e. Include adjoining steel and zinc coated piping, ducts and conduit, whether surfaces are
bare or previously painted.
f. Exclude concrete floors, walkways and like surfaces.
g. Concrete surfaces to be smooth and with minimum pinholes and like voids.
h. Operating surface temperature of 150 F maximum.
2. System:
a. Description: Acrylic emulsion coating system, single component, high solids content, low
odor and non - yellowing; abrasion, stain, chemical, water and mildew resistant; non -
immersion service, no surface filler, smooth texture, flat sheen finish.
b. 1st Coat: Acrylic emulsion, rust- inhibitive, self - priming, 42 percent minimum solids by
volume, 1.0 Ibs/gal (120 g/L) maximum VOC, 10.0 mils (255 microns) minimum dry film
thickness.
AES127210 PAINTING
18JAN08
09900 -11
Aim
11110 0
c. 2nd Coat: Acrylic emulsion, 42 percent minimum solids by volume, 1.0 Ibs/gal (120 g/L)
maximum VOC, 8.0 mils (205 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
3. Acceptable Products:
a. Tnemec Company, Inc.:
1) 1st Coat: Series 180 W.B. Tneme- Crete.
2) 2nd Coat: Series 180 W.B. Tneme - Crete.
B. Paint System IPS -C8 - Concrete Floor Markings, Epoxy:
1. Uses: Markings painted on concrete floor substrates.
2. System:
a. Description: Polyamide epoxy coating system, two component, high solids content;
abrasion, chemical and water resistant; non - immersion service, meeting USDA and FDA
acceptability regulations, satin sheen finish.
b. 1st Coat: Polyamide epoxy, 54 percent minimum solids by volume, thinned to be self -prime
as required for substrate, 3.4 Ibs/gal (408 g/L) maximum VOC unthinned, 4.0 mils (100
microns) minimum dry film thickness.
c. 2nd Coat: Polyamide epoxy, 54 percent minimum solids by volume, 3.4 Ibs/gal (408 g/L)
maximum VOC unthinned, 4.0 mils (100 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
3. Acceptable Products:
a. Tnemec Company, Inc.:
1) 1 st Coat: Series 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline.
2) 2nd Coat: Series 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline.
2.10
2.11 INDOOR PAINT SYSTEMS - MASONRY (IPS -MA)
A. Paint System IPS -MA1 - Indoor Concrete Unit Masonry, Acrylic Epoxy Emulsion - Normal:
1. Uses:
a. Standard face concrete unit masonry surfaces.
b. Masonry surfaces not in contact with concentration of moisture or water and opposite side
not in contact with earth and not sealed to permit vapor passage (breathable).
c. Operating surface temperature of 150 F maximum.
2. System:
a. Description: Acrylic epoxy emulsion system, two component, high solids content, low odor
and non - yellowing; abrasion, stain, chemical and water resistant; non - immersion service,
meeting USDA and FDA acceptability regulations, with surface filler, satin or gloss sheen
finish as required.
AESI 27210 PAINTING 09900 -12
18JAN08
IE
• 0
b. 1st Coat: Cementitious acrylic surface filler, 66 percent minimum solids by volume, 0.6
lbs/gal (77 g/L) maximum VOC unthinned, complete coverage with pores filled and uniform
surface at 85 sf /gal (7.9 m /gal) maximum application rate.
c. 2nd Coat: Acrylic epoxy emulsion, 40 percent minimum solids by volume, 2.2 Ibs/gal (299
g /L) maximum VOC unthinned, 5.0 mils (125 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
d. 3rd Coat: Acrylic epoxy emulsion, 40 percent minimum solids by volume, 2.2 Ibs/gal (299
g/L) maximum VOC unthinned, 5.0 mils (125 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
3. Acceptable Products:
a. Tnemec Company, Inc.:
1) 1st Coat: Series 130 Envirofil.
2) 2nd Coat: Series 113 H.B. Tneme - Tufcoat.
3) 3rd Coat: Series 113 H.B. Tneme- Tufcoat for satin sheen or Series 114 H.B. Tneme-
Tufcoat for gloss sheen.
2.12 INDOOR PAINT SYSTEMS - OVERHEAD EXPANSES (IPS -OHE)
A. Paint System IPS -OHE1 - Indoor Overhead Concrete and Metal, Acrylic Emulsion:
1. Use:
a. Concrete, ferrous metal and zinc coated metal ceiling and overhead expanse surfaces.
b. Include cast -in -place concrete, structural steel, steel joist, steel deck, miscellaneous metal
fabrications sprayed fireproofing, intumescent fireproofing, and insulated and non - insulated
piping, ducts and equipment; conduit and like items.
c. Exclude concrete unit masonry.
d. Exclude ladders, catwalk and other like items.
e. Do not endanger performance and bond of sprayed fireproofing and intumescent
fireproofing, and fire resistance ratings of assemblies in which sprayed fireproofing or
intumescent fireproofing is used. Verify use of materials and procedures with manufacturer
of sprayed fireproofing and intumescent fireproofing.
f. Maximum operating surface temperature of 150 F.
2. System:
a. Description: Hydrophobic acrylic polymer emulsion coating system, rust inhibitive, self -
priming, one coat coverage, spray applied, wet fall type paint, eggshell sheen finish.
b. 1st Coat: Hydrophobic acrylic polymer emulsion, 37 percent minimum solids by volume, 2.7
Ibs/gal (200 g/L) maximum VOC, 4.0 mils (100 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
AESI 27210 PAINTING 09900 -13
18JAN08
Q �
3. Acceptable Products:
a. Tnemec Company, Inc.:
1) 1 st Coat: Series 17 W. B. Uni -Bond.
2.13 INDOOR PAINT SYSTEMS - METAL (IPS -ME)
A. Paint System IPS -ME3 - Indoor Ferrous Metal, Alkyd:
1. Uses:
a. Ferrous metal surfaces.
b. Include structural steel, steel joists, steel deck, miscellaneous metal fabrications, frames of
overhead doors, pipe guards (bollards), handrails and railings, hollow metal items; non -
insulated piping, ducts and equipment; conduit and like items.
c. Exclude structural steel, steel joists, steel deck and like items associated with ceilings and
overhead expanses, such as warehouse spaces.
d. Exclude sprayed fireproofing and acoustical treatment.
e. Operating surface temperature of 150 F maximum.
2. System:
a. Description: Alkyd coating system, general purpose; light abrasion and mild industrial fume
resistant; non - immersion service, meeting USDA and FDA acceptability regulations, semi-
gloss or gloss sheen finish as required.
b. 1st Coat: Modified alkyd rust - inhibitive primer, 54 percent minimum solids by volume, 3.2
lbs/gal (383 g /L) maximum VOC unthinned, 2.5 mils (65 microns) minimum dry film
thickness.
c. 2nd Coat: Alkyd enamel, 47 percent minimum solids by volume, 3.5 Ibs/gal (422 g/L)
maximum VOC unthinned, 2.0 mils (50 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
d. 3rd Coat: Alkyd enamel, 47 percent minimum solids by volume, 3.5 Ibs/gal (422 g /L)
maximum VOC unthinned, 2.0 mils (50 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
3. Acceptable Products:
a. Tnemec Company, Inc.:
1) 1st Coat: Series 10 Primer.
2) 2nd Coat: Series 23 Enduratone or Series 2H Hi -Build Tneme - Gloss, to match 3rd
Coat.
3) 3rd Coat: Series 23 Enduratone for semi -gloss sheen or Series 2H Hi -Build Tneme-
Gloss for gloss sheen.
AESI 27210 PAINTING 09900 -14
18JAN08
• 0
B. Paint System IPS - ME4 - Indoor Non - Ferrous Metal, Alkyd:
1. Uses:
a. Zinc coated metal (galvanized) and non - ferrous metal surfaces.
b. Include structural steel, steel joists, steel deck, miscellaneous metal fabrications, hollow
metal items; non - insulated piping, ducts and equipment; conduit and like items.
c. Exclude structural steel, steel joists, steel deck and like items associated with ceilings and
overhead expanses, such as warehouse spaces.
d. Exclude sprayed fireproofing and acoustical treatment.
e. Operating surface temperature of 150 F maximum.
2. System:
a. Description: Alkyd coating system, general purpose; light abrasion, and mild industrial fume
resistant; non - immersion service, meeting USDA and FDA acceptability regulations, semi-
gloss or gloss sheen finish as required.
b. 1st Coat: Polyamide epoxy, self- priming, 56 percent minimum solids by volume, 3.1 Ibs/gal
(375 g/L) maximum VOC unthinned, 5.0 mils (125 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
Coat required on items with bare surfaces or with previously prime painted surfaces not
coated with this 1st Coat coating material.
c. 2nd Coat: Alkyd enamel, 47 percent minimum solids by volume, 3.5 Ibs/gal (422 g/L)
maximum VOC unthinned, 2.0 mils (50 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
d. 3rd Coat: Alkyd enamel, 47 percent minimum solids by volume, 3.5 Ibs/gal (422 g/L)
maximum VOC unthinned, 2.0 mils (50 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
3. Acceptable Products:
a. Tnemec Company, Inc.:
1) 1st Coat: Series 27 F.C. Typoxy.
2) 2nd Coat: Series 23 Enduratone or Series 2H Hi -Build Tneme - Gloss, to match 3rd
Coat.
3) 3rd Coat: Series 23 Enduratone for semi -gloss sheen or Series 2H Hi -Build Tneme-
Gloss for gloss sheen.
C. Paint System IPS -ME5 - Indoor Metal, Polyurethane:
1. Uses:
a. Ferrous metal, zinc coated metal (galvanized, or inorganic or organic zinc rich primed) and
non-ferrous metal surfaces.
b. Include structural steel, steel joists, steel deck, miscellaneous metal fabrications, overhead
door frames, pipe guards (bollards), handrails and railings, hollow metal items; non -
insulated piping, ducts and equipment; conduit and like items.
AESI 27210 PAINTING 09900 -15
18JAN08
c. Exclude structural steel, steel joists, steel deck and like items associated with ceilings and
overhead expanses, such as in warehouse spaces.
d. Maximum operating surface temperature of 150 F.
e. Exclude sprayed fireproofing and acoustical treatment.
2. System:
a. Description: Aliphatic acrylic polyurethane coating system, two component, high solids
content; abrasion, chemical and water resistant; non - immersion service, meeting USDA
and FDA acceptability regulations; eggshell, semi -gloss or gloss sheen finish as required.
b. 1st Coat: Polyamide epoxy, self - priming, 56 percent minimum solids by volume, 3.1 Ibs/gal
(375 g /L) maximum VOC unthinned, 5.0 mils (125 microns) minimum dry film thickness
Coat required on items with bare surfaces or with previously prime painted surfaces not
coated with this 1 st Coat coating material.
c. 2nd Coat: Aliphatic acrylic polyurethane, 68 percent minimum solids by volume, 2.4 Ibs/gal
(290 g/L) maximum VOC, 2.5 mils (65 microns) minimum dry film thickness. Polyurethane
shall not contain modified alkyd resin binder.
d. 3rd Coat: Aliphatic acrylic polyurethane, 68 percent minimum solids by volume, 2.4 Ibs/gal
(290 g/L) maximum VOC, 2.5 mils (65 microns) minimum dry film thickness. Polyurethane
shall not contain modified alkyd resin binder.
3. Acceptable Products:
a. Tnemec Company, Inc.:
1) 1st Coat: Series 27 F.C. Typoxy.
2.14 INDOOR PAINT SYSTEMS - WOOD (IPS -W)
A. Paint System IPS W1 - Indoor Opaque Finish Wood, Alkyd:
1. Uses: Wood surfaces to receive an opaque painted finish.
2. System:
a. Description: Alkyd coating system, general purpose, meeting USDA and FDA acceptability
regulations, semi -gloss sheen finish.
b. 1st Coat: Alkyd or oleoresinous primer, 54 percent minimum solids by volume, 2.7 Ibs/gal
(324 g/L) maximum VOC unthinned, 2.5 mils (65 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
c. 2nd Coat: Alkyd enamel, 54 percent minimum solids by volume, 3.3 Ibs/gal (397 g/L)
maximum VOC unthinned, 2.0 mils (50 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
d. 3rd Coat: Alkyd enamel, 54 percent minimum solids by volume, 3.3 Ibs/gal (397 g/L)
maximum VOC unthinned, 2.0 mils (50 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
AESI 27210 PAINTING 09900 -16
18JAN08
F7
3. Acceptable Products:
a. Tnemec Company, Inc.:
1) 1st Coat: Series 36-603 Undercoater.
2) 2nd Coat: Series 23 Enduratone.
3) 3rd Coat: Series 23 Enduratone.
2.15 INDOOR PAINT SYSTEMS - GYPSUM BOARD (IPS -GB)
A. Paint System IPS -GB1 - Indoor Gypsum Board, Acrylic Emulsion:
1. Uses:
a. Gypsum board (drywall) ceiling surfaces.
•
b. Gypsum board (drywall) wall surfaces not requiring an applied covering material.
2. System:
a. Description: Acrylic emulsion coating system; alkali, mildew and blister resistant; meeting
USDA and FDA acceptability regulations, low gloss or semi -gloss sheen finish.
b. 1st Coat: Vinyl acrylic emulsion primer, 26 percent minimum solids by volume, 1.3 Ibs/gal
(151 g/L) maximum VOC unthinned, 1.5 mils (40 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
c. 2nd Coat: Acrylic emulsion, 41 percent minimum solids by volume, 1.9 Ibs/gal (224 g/L)
maximum VOC unthinned, 2.5 mils (65 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
d. 3rd Coat: Acrylic emulsion, 41 percent minimum solids by volume, 2.2 Ibs/gal (258 g/L)
maximum VOC unthinned, 2.5 mils (65 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
3. Acceptable Products:
a. Tnemec Company, Inc.:
1) 1st Coat: 51 -792 PVA Sealer.
2) 2nd Coat: Series 6 Tneme -Cryl.
3) 3rd Coat: Series 6 Tneme -Cryl for low gloss sheen or Series 7 Tneme-Cryl SG for
semi -gloss sheen.
2.16 INDOOR PAINT SYSTEMS -WOOD CEMENT BOARD (IPS WCB)
A. Paint System IPS WCB1 -Indoor Wood Cement Board, Acrylic Emulsion:
1. Uses:
a. Wood cement board ceiling surfaces.
b. Wood cement board wall surfaces not requiring an applied covering material.
AES127210 PAINTING 09900 -17
18JAN08
2. System:
a. Description: Acrylic emulsion coating system; alkali, mildew and blister resistant; meeting
USDA and FDA acceptability regulations, low gloss or semi -gloss sheen finish.
b. 1st Coat: Vinyl acrylic emulsion primer, 26 percent minimum solids by volume, 1.3 Ibs/gal
maximum VOC unthinned, 1.5 mils (40 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
c. 2nd Coat: Acrylic emulsion, 41 percent minimum solids by volume, 1.9 Ibs/gal (224 g/L)
maximum VOC unthinned, 2.5 mils (65 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
d. 3rd Coat: Acrylic emulsion, 41 percent minimum solids by volume, 2.2 Ibs/gal (258 g/L)
maximum VOC unthinned, 2.5 mils (65 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
3. Acceptable Products:
a. Tnemec Company, Inc.:
1) 1st Coat: 51 -792 PVA Sealer.
2) 2nd Coat: Series 6 Tneme -Cryl.
3) 3rd Coat: Series 6 Tneme -Cryl for low gloss sheen or Series 7 Tneme -Cryl SG for
semi -gloss sheen.
2.17 INDOOR PAINT SYSTEMS - INSULATION COVERING (IPS -IC)
A. Paint System IPS -IC1 - Indoor Insulation Covering, Acrylic Emulsion:
1. Uses:
a. Canvas or plastic coverings over thermal insulation, except at overhead expanses.
b. Include insulation coverings over piping, ducts, equipment and like items.
c. Operating surface temperature of 150 F maximum.
2. System:
a. Description: Acrylic emulsion coating system, fungicidal agent; alkali, mildew and blister
resistant; meeting USDA and FDA acceptability regulations, low gloss or semi -gloss sheen
finish as required.
b. 1st Coat: Acrylic emulsion, self- priming, 41 percent minimum solids by volume, 1.9 Ibs/gal
(224 g/L) maximum VOC unthinned, 2.5 mils (65 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
c. 2nd Coat: Acrylic emulsion, 41 percent minimum solids by volume, 2.2 Ibs/gal (258 g/L)
maximum VOC unthinned, 2.5 mils (65 microns) minimum dry film thickness.
3. Acceptable Products:
a. Tnemec Company, Inc.:
1) 1st Coat: Series 6 Tneme-Cryl.
1E
AESI 27210 PAINTING 09900 -18
18JAN08
�7
2) 2nd Coat: Series 6 Tneme -Cryl for low gloss sheen or Series 7 Tneme -Cryl SG for
semi -gloss sheen.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be applied for compliance with
requirements of Contract Documents and to determine if conditions affecting performance of
painting are satisfactory. Do not proceed with application until unsatisfactory conditions have been
resolved. Commencement of application shall constitute acceptance of conditions.
B. Starting Painting: Starting of painting will be construed as acceptance by applicator of surfaces
and conditions within any particular area.
3.02 GENERAL
A. Perform painting work meeting requirements of Contract Documents, as indicated by final
reviewed submittals for the work and meeting instructions and recommendations of paint
manufacturer.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures and similar
items in place and not to be finish painted, or provide surface applied protection prior to surface
preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for complete painting of items and
adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall removed
items. Removal and reinstallation of such items shall be performed by workmen skilled in trades
involved.
3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures meeting instructions of paint manufacturer and
as specified in this Article, for each particular substrate condition.
2. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and
grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so that contaminants from
cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly painted surfaces.
3. Wash dusty, dirty and greasy surfaces with solution of trisodium phosphate and water, and
rinse with clean water and allow to dry. Remove extraneous adhesive droppings, wax and
paste from surfaces. Remove penetrated oil and grease with cleaning solvents. Remove
damaged paints, and loose adhering, scaly and blistered paint..
4. Fill dents, cracks, hollow places, open joints and other irregularities with a filler suitable for
purpose.
5. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify
Architect in writing of any anticipated problems using specified coating systems with
substrates primed under other sections of Specification.
AESI 27210 PAINTING 09900 -19
18JAN08
D O
B. Cementitious Surfaces:
1. Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster and like
substrates to be painted by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease and oils, and by
roughening as required to remove glaze.
2. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by performing appropriate
tests. If surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish
paint, correct this condition before application of paint. Do not paint over surfaces where
moisture content exceeds that permitted in printed instructions of paint manufacturer.
3. Remove form oil from concrete by washing with a solution of 1 -1/2 pounds of caustic soda to 1
gallon of hot water, and then rinse thoroughly with dean water and allow to dry.
4. Except as otherwise required for paint system, dean concrete floor surfaces to be painted by
abrasive blast method. Use of etching cleaners or acid is not acceptable. Remove residue and
clean surfaces without use of water.
5. Spackle minor cracks, voids, blemishes and other imperfections in cementitious surfaces
which necessitate only minimum work flush with adjoining surfaces and when dry sand
smooth. After prime coat, if any minor defects become evident or additional spackling is
necessary, perform further spackling before following coat of paint is applied.
C. Ferrous Metal Surfaces:
1. Clean ferrous metal surfaces, which are not zinc coated or galvanized, or shop - coated, of oil,
grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning
meeting requirements of SSPC SP1, SP2 and SP3, as applicable.
2. Touch -up shop applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare. Clean and then touch -up with
same type shop primer as shop primer.
D. Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Metal Surfaces:
1. Clean zinc coated (galvanized) metal surfaces free of oil and surface contaminants with an
appropriate non - petroleum based solvent meeting requirements of SSPC SP1.
2. Remove rust by mechanical cleaning meeting requirements of SSPC SP2 or SP3, as
applicable. Apply coating of zinc coating touch -up to damaged areas, cuts and welds of zinc
coating.
E. Non - Ferrous Metal Surfaces: Clean non - ferrous metal surfaces free of oxides, oil and surface
contaminates with an appropriate non - petroleum based solvent meeting requirements of SSPC
SP1.
F. Wood Surfaces:
1. Clean wood surfaces of dirt, oil or other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and
sandpaper, as applicable. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view, and
dust -off.
2. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other
recommended knot sealer, before application of prime coat. A primer - sealer meeting
requirements of WWPA Formula WP -578 -P may be used in lieu of separate knot sealer and
primer application.
AES127210 PAINTING 09900 -20
18JAN08
• 0
3. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with plastic wood- filler. Sandpaper
smooth when dried.
4. Prime, stain or seal wood required to be painted immediately upon delivery to project site.
Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides and backsides of such wood, including cabinets,
counters, paneling and like items, except when such surfaces are prefinished.
5. Backprime wood on interior partitions only where masonry, plaster or other wet wall
construction occurs on backside.
6. Use spar varnish for backpriming wood with transparent finish.
G. Plaster Surfaces:
1. Prepare plaster surfaces by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust and dirt.
2. Scratches, cracks and abrasions in plaster surfaces and openings adjoining trim shall be cut
as required, then filled with plaster spackle of type appropriate for actual type plaster being
prepared. Spackle shall be flush with adjoining surfaces and when dry, sand to match parent
surface. After prime coat, if any defects become evident or additional spackling is necessary,
perform further spackling before following coat of paint is applied.
3. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If
surface are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint,
correct this condition before application of paint.
H. Gypsum Board Surfaces:
0 i
1. Prepare gypsum board surfaces by removing chalk, dust and dirt.
2. Spackle minor cracks, voids, blemished and other imperfections in gypsum board surfaces
which necessitate only minimum work. Spackle shall be flush with adjoining surfaces and
when dry, sand smooth. After prime coat, if any defects become evident or additional
spackling is necessary, perform further spackling before following coat of paint is applied.
3. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If
surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint,
correct this condition before application of paint.
I. Wood Cement Board Surfaces:
1. Prepare wood cement board surfaces by removing chalk, dust and dirt.
2. Spackle minor cracks, voids, blemished and other imperfections in wood cement board
surfaces which necessitate only minimum work. Spackle shall be flush with adjoining surfaces
and when dry, sand smooth. After prime coat, if any defects become evident or additional
spackling is necessary, perform further spackling before following coat of paint is applied.
3. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If
surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint,
correct this condition before application of paint.
AESI 27210 PAINTING 09900 -21
18JAN08
Amok
3.05 MATERIALS PREPARATION
A. Mix and prepare painting materials meeting instructions of manufacturer.
B. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required
during application of materials. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and if
necessary, strain material before using.
C. Do not thin paints, except as otherwise required by instructions of manufacturer.
3.06 APPLICATION
A. General:
1. Apply paint meeting instructions of manufacturer. Use applicators and techniques best suited
for substrate and type of material being applied.
2. Apply paint to only prepared surfaces. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture,
scuffed surfaces or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
3. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content of substrate exceeds limit instructed or
recommended in printed instructions of paint manufacturer.
4. Where paint will be applied to shop primed or painted surfaces, and manufacturer and type of
existing paint is unknown, applicator shall perform a compatibility test to ensure paint will
properly adhere without lifting, softening or causing other detrimental effects. Notify Architect
of paint incompatibility.
5. Apply first coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise prepared
for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
6. Minimum dry film thickness specified for each coat of each paint system shall be uniformly
attained at all points on surfaces. Areas of insufficient film thickness shall be recoated to build-
up paint coat to specified minimum dry film thickness. Film thickness shall not be so great that
either the appearance or service life of the paint will be detrimentally affected.
7. Each paint coat shall be uniformly applied, free of holidays, voids, pinholes, air bubbles, runs,
and sags. In addition, finish coats shall be free of brush or roller marks, streaks, laps and pile-
up.
a. Leave detailed work, including corners, edges, projections and depressions of surfaces,
with no build -up and excessive amount of paint.
b. During application, runs and sags shall be removed to bare surface or to previous coat and
affected area immediately repainted.
c. Seal open seams of contact surfaces which could retain moisture before applying
subsequent coats.
d. Termination of paint at corners, abutting surfaces not to be painted, or where color of finish
coat changes shall be straight, lean, sharp edges with no overlap.
8. Each coat of paint shall be in a proper state of cure or dryness, as instructed by paint
manufacturer, before application of subsequent coat. Allow sufficient time between successive
AES127210 PAINTING 09900 -22
18JAN08
coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does
not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat of
paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of undercoat.
9. Treat each paint coat to remove minor surface defects and for proper intercoat adhesion, by
lightly sanding, pumice stoning, solvent treatment or other suitable process specified by paint
manufacturer to produce a uniform and smooth surface. Maintain specified minimum dry film
thickness.
B. Application Types:
1. Brush Application:
a. Brush -out and work brush coats in both directions onto surfaces in a uniform film. Use
brushes best suited for type of material being applied. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps,
brush marks, runs, sags, droopiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
b. Brush apply prime coats, except as otherwise required to use roller or mechanical
application.
2. Roller Application:
a. Roll -out and work roller coats in both directions onto surfaces in a uniform film. Roller
sleeves shall be dean, full dipped pile, or as recommended by paint manufacturer for
material and texture required.
b. Use brush at corners, fasteners, irregular surfaces or items, and like conditions.
3. Mechanical Application:
a. Use mechanical paint application methods only when acceptable for type of paint to be
applied, condition of substrate to receive paint and like conditions.
b. Spray equipment shall be suitable for type of paint to be applied. Equip spray equipment
with properly working moisture trap, regulators and gauges.
c. Do not double back with spray equipment for purpose of building up film thickness of two
coats in one pass.
C. Finishes:
1. Stipple Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of
rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks or other surface imperfections.
2. Pigmented Finish: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish,
color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs,
sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
3. Transparent Finish: Produce smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps,
cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes or other surface
imperfections.
4. Completed Work: Match final reviewed samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove,
refinish or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements.
AES127210 PAINTING 09900 -23
18JAN08
N
3.07 COVERAGE
A. Paint System Coverage: Surfaces shall receive coats of respective specified paint system as
specified in this Paragraph.
1. General:
a. Number of coats, and dry film thickness for each paint coat and total paint system shall be
as specified, regardless of application method and spreading rates. Meet recommended
spreading rate of paint manufacturer even though additional material or coats may be
required to achieve specified dry film thickness.
b. Apply additional coats when undercoats or other conditions show through final coat of paint,
until paint film is of uniform finish, color, sheen and appearance. Give special attention to
insure surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds and exposed fasteners, receive
specified dry film thickness.
c. Recoat primed, sealed or previously painted surfaces where there is evidence of suction
spots, unsealed areas or other defects in previous coating, to assure a finish coat with no
defects due to insufficient sealing.
2. Bare Surfaces:
a. General: Bare surfaces, including mill coated surfaces, shall receive all coats of paint
system, except as otherwise required. Apply prime coat to surfaces which have not been
prime coated under other sections of Specification.
b. Structural Steel: Bare surfaces of structural steel, steel joists, steel deck, to be only prime
painted in the completed work, shall be prime painted.
3. Prime Painted Surfaces:
a. General: Prime painted surfaces, including shop coated or prime painted surfaces, shall
receive intermediate and finish coats of paint system after previous prime coat is touched -
up, except as otherwise required. Omit prime coat (first coat) on ferrous metal surfaces
which have been shop prime painted, unless otherwise specified, except for touch -up. If
necessary, first provide a barrier coat over previously painted surface to prevent interaction
with subsequent coat, such as film lifting.
b. Structural Steel: Shop coated or prime painted surfaces of structural steel, steel joists and
steel deck, to remain only prime painted in the completed work, shall be only touch -up
painted. Paint for touch -up coat shall be as specified for applicable paint system. Touch -up
coat shall overlap previous coat 2 inches minimum and then feather.
4. Previously Finished Surfaces: When previously finished surfaces are required to be painted or
repainted, such surfaces shall receive two coats of finish coat material of paint system after
previous paint finish is touched -up. If necessary, first provide a barrier coat over previously
painted surface to prevent interaction with subsequent coat, such as film lifting.
5. Touch -Up Painting: Bare areas or marred, scrapped or otherwise damaged areas of
previously painted surfaces shall be touch -up painted after such areas are prepared, and
prime, intermediate and finish coats, as required, are applied to equal coverage and thickness
of adjoining, unaffected areas. Apply touch -up paint before applying required paint system.
Paint for touch -up coat shall be as specified for applicable paint system. Touch -up coat shall
overlap previous coat 2 inches minimum and then feather.
AESI 27210 PAINTING
09900 -24
18JAN08
• 0
B. Coverage Details:
1. Joint Sealants: Do not paint elastomeric joint sealants.
2. Doors:
a. Finish door edges at jambs, top of head and bottom of sill same as door faces.
b. When each face of swing door is to be a different color, and color of frame is to match door,
change color or terminate painting on frame at line formed by external corner of door stop,
adjacent to door. Color of door edges shall be same as hinge -side door face.
3. Access Doors: Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match
exposed surfaces.
4. Behind Equipment:
a. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
b. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat before final
installation of equipment or furniture. Exposed surfaces are defined as those areas visible
when permanent or built -in fixtures are in place.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Work:
a. Painted: Mechanical and electrical items to be painted is limited to following:
1) General: Exposed surfaces of unfinished, zinc coated or galvanized, and prime
painted mechanical and electrical items, including piping, conduit and equipment.
Paint to match adjacent surfaces in paint system type, color and sheen, except as
otherwise indicated by Contract Documents.
2) Mechanical: Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, following:
a) Piping, pipe hangers, and supports, including any associated insulation or
covering.
b) Ductwork, including any associated insulation or covering.
c) Mechanical equipment and supports.
d) Accessory items.
3) Electrical: Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, following:
a) Conduit and fittings.
b) Electrical equipment and supports.
c) Accessory items.
b. Not Painted: Mechanical and electrical work not to be painted includes, but is not limited to,
following:
1) Fire protection sprinkler heads.
40 1 AESI 27210 PAINTING 09900 -25
18JAN08
2) Explosion -proof electrical work.
c. Hazardous Parts: Hazardous parts of equipment shall be painted in accordance with
requirements specified in Paragraph - Color Coding, of this Article.
d. Interior Surfaces: Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, convector and baseboard heating
cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat sheen, black paint,
to limit of sight lines. Paint dampers exposed immediately behind louvers and grilles to
match face panels.
e. Sensitive Parts: Protect valve stems, glass, moving parts, bearings, couplings, shafts,
lubricant fittings and other sensitive parts from damage resulting from painting operations,
including surface preparation, over application and dripping.
f. Machined Parts: Do not paint finish machined parts, tubes and fins of air coolers, non-
metallic parts, such as plastics, ceramics and rubber.
g. Non - Ferrous Metals: Except as otherwise required, aluminum, brass, bronze, copper and
stainless steel items shall not be painted.
C. Color Coding:
1. Physical Hazards: Physical hazards shall be color coded meeting requirements of OSHA
29CFR1910, July 1, 1989 Edition, Chapter 1910.144, and ANSI Z535.1, except as otherwise
required. Specifications for colors shall be as designated in OSHA 29CFR1910 and ANSI
Z535.1.
a. Red:
1) Solid background outlining of fire protection and quenching equipment and apparatus,
including fire extinguishers, hose locations, fire protection sprinkler piping valve
wheels, alarms, control devices and signs.
2) Fire protection control and alarm wiring junction boxes.
3) Emergency stop bars on hazardous machines and electrical switches for emergency
stopping of machines.
b. Orange: Outlining dangerous parts of machines and equipment
c. Yellow: Designate areas requiring caution; marking physical hazards such as railings, floor
openings, curbs and chains; bollards and designated walkway areas, except as otherwise
required.
d. Green: Designate location of safety showers and first -aid equipment. Provide with white
cross and green background.
e. Black and White: Designation of traffic lanes.
2. Piping: Color scheme and coding identification of piping, including valve wheels, shall meet
requirements of ANSI A13.1, except as otherwise required.
a. Color Scheme: Paint piping meeting color scheme requirements of ANSI 13.1, except as
AES127210 PAINTING 09900 -26
18JAN08
4
•
C �
J
otherwise required. Include painting of valve wheels and handles same color as associated
piping.
1) General:
a) Fire protection and quenching material piping: Red.
b) Hazardous material, including flammable, explosive, chemically active, toxic,
extreme temperature or pressure, and radioactive piping: Yellow.
c) Low hazard liquid or liquid admixture material piping: Green.
d) Low hazard gas or gaseous admixture material piping: Blue.
b. Coding Identification: Identification labels, flow arrows, label sizes and colors for piping,
conduit and like items will be provided under Division 15 - Mechanical and Division 16 -
Electrical, as applicable.
3. Equipment: Color scheme and coding identification of equipment shall meet applicable
requirements specified for physical hazards and piping, except as otherwise required.
a. Color Scheme: Paint equipment as follows:
1) General: Same color as required for associated piping, except as otherwise required.
b. Coding Identification: Identification labels, flow arrows, label sizes and colors, and like items
will be provided under Division 15 - Mechanical and Division 16 - Electrical, as applicable.
n
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General:
1. Owner will employ a Quality Control Service to perform during construction quality assurance
and control evaluations of work to verify compliance of work with requirements of Contract
Documents. Evaluations will include, but are not limited to, criteria specified in this Article.
Quality Control Service will provide testing facilities and equipment.
2. Work may require re- evaluation as directed by Architect anytime during progress of the work.
Re- evaluation of rejected work and evaluation of replacement work shall be performed at
expense of Contractor, at no addition to Contract Sum.
B. Paint Materials Evaluations:
1. Samples of materials delivered to project site will be taken, identified and sealed, and certified
in presence of Contractor. Perform minimum of one test for each paint material of different
color and sheen.
2. Appropriate tests will be performed for any or all of following characteristics: Abrasion
resistance, apparent reflectivity, flexibility, washability, absorption, accelerated weathering, dry
opacity, accelerated yellowness, recoating, skinning, color retention, alkali resistance and
quantitative materials analysis.
3. If test results indicate material being used does not meet specified requirements, stop painting
work and remove non - complying paint, and prepare surfaces and repaint surfaces with
specified paint.
AES127210 PAINTING
18JAN08
09900 -27
AFN
a
C. Thickness Evaluations: Dry film thickness of paint applied to surfaces will be satisfactory, if when
measured from top of anchor pattern peaks or other high spots of surfaces, thickness of paint
system meets specified requirements. Perform minimum of one test for each coat of each paint
system on each different substrate. If paint system does not meet requirements of Contract
Documents, apply additional coats of paint to achieve required dry film thickness or perform other
corrective methods as acceptable to Architect.
3.09 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Upon completion of painting work, clean paint spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
paint by methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage
finished surfaces.
B. Protection: Provide wet paint signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. Remove
temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of
painting operations.
C. Adjusting:
1. At completion of work of other trades, touch -up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces as acceptable to Architect.
2. Repair defective areas of applied paint, including rugs, sags, air bubbles, dirt, holidays and
pile -up. After preparation, apply additional paint coats as required to meet requirements
specified. Apply finish to entire surface effected, including area to make juncture with adjacent
surfaces.
3.10 PAINT SCHEDULE
A. General: Where Contract Documents do not indicate a specific paint system, provide paint system
of respective type for space and substrate indicated in this Schedule. In addition, provide paint
system of appropriate type at other locations as required.
B. Outdoor Surfaces:
1. Cast -In -Place Concrete Walls, Non - Architectural or Non - Exposed with Formed Texture: Paint
System OPS -C1.
2. Concrete Unit Masonry: Paint System OPS -MA1.
3. Metal Fabrications: Paint System OPS -ME5.
4. Hollow Steel Doors and Frames: Paint System OPS -ME5.
5. Portland Cement Plaster Soffits: Paint System OPS -P1.
6. Gypsum Board Soffits: OPS -GB1.
C. Indoor Garage, Storage and Equipment Space Surfaces:
1. Concrete Floor Stripes: Paint System IPS -C8.
2. Concrete Ceiling and Unit Masonry walls: Paint System IPS -MA1.
3. Metal Fabrications: Paint System IPS -ME3.
4. Hollow Steel Doors and Frames: Paint System IPS -ME3.
AES127210 PAINTING 09900 -28
18JAN08
• s
a
D. Indoor Stairwells:
1. Concrete Unit Masonry: Paint System IPS -MA1.
2. Metal Fabrication Items: Paint System IPS -ME4.
3. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Paint System IPS -ME4.
E. Indoor Toilet Space Surfaces:
1. Concrete Unit Masonry: Paint System IPS -MA1.
2. Metal Fabrications: Paint System IPS -ME5.
3. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Paint System IPS -ME4.
I I
END OF SECTION
AESI 27210 PAINTING
18JAN08
4. Gypsum Board: Paint System IPS -GB1.
F. Indoor Mechanical and Electrical Work Surfaces: Paint system same as adjacent building
surfaces or Paint System IPS -ME5 as applicable
G. Indoor Color Coding:
1. Metal Surfaces: Paint System IPS -ME3.
2. Insulation Covering: Paint System IPS -IC1.
H. Overhead Expanses
1. Indoor Overhead Concrete and Metal: IPS -OHEI.
I. Indoor Apartment Wood Surfaces:
1. Wood Trim: IPS WI.
09900 -29
E:
PI
• 0
7*3
A. EPSTEIN AND SONS INTERNATIONAL SECTION 10210
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS WALL LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Description: Wall louvers are indicated by Contract Documents and shall include work necessary and
incidental to completion and performance of the Work.
B. Included: Wall louvers include, but are not limited to, following:
1. Design, engineering, detailing, fabrication and installation of work.
2. Fixed metal wall louvers.
3. Screens and blank -off panels for louvers.
4. Sealant at joints between louvers and adjacent construction.
El
C. Schedule: Required types of wall louvers include, but are not limited to, types specified and scheduled
in Part 2 of this Section.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology: Refer to AMCA 501 for definitions of terms for metal louvers not otherwise defined in this
Section or referenced standards.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of following, except to extent of most stringent requirements
of Contract Documents and of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on performance of
the Work:
1. AA -Aluminum Standards and Data.
2. AISC - Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings,
including Commentary.
3. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
4. AMCA 501 - Application Manual for Air Louvers.
5. AWS D1.2 - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.
6. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
7. Specification Section 07920 - Joint Sealants.
B. Performance Basis:
General: Descriptions and requirements indicated by Contract Documents establish basic
arrangements, visual concepts, profiles and sightiines of members, dimensions and modules of
units, performance and like requirements. Within these limitations, work shall meet arrangements,
visual concepts, function, operation, performance requirements and like requirements indicated by
Contract Documents, and include components not indicated but necessary for performance,
function, operation and to be a complete system. Perform modifications only as necessaryto meet
requirements of Contract Documents and to coordinate work, subject to acceptance by Architect.
Maintain visual concepts. Variations in details and products shall not adversely affect visual
concepts, appearance, performance, strength and durability. Provide complete drawings and data
of proposed modifications.
IV AESI 27210 WALL LOUVERS
18JAN08
10210 -1
G J
2. Certification: Work required to meet indicated structural design criteria requirement, shall be
designed, certified, reviewed and inspected by licensed engineer of Contractor subject to minimum
requirements of Contract Documents.
C. Performance Requirements:
1. General: Work shall meet performance requirements indicated by Contract Documents, including
requirements indicated in this Paragraph and like requirements specified in other parts of this
Section.
2. Performance Conditions: Performance of work shall include live loads, creep, shrinkage,
deflections, temperature variations, stresses, expansion and contraction requirements, seismic
forces, and other like conditions meeting most stringent requirements of Contract Documents and
of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work without
evidencing permanent deformation of louver components, including frame, supports and blades,
and metal fatigue and noise caused by louver blade rattle or flutter.
3. Loading: Work shall withstand a minimum uniform pressure, both positive (acting inward) and
negative (acting outward), acting normal to plane and over gross area of surfaces of uniform static
air pressure meeting requirements of Section 01415 - Performance Requirements, without
exceeding deflection requirements.
4. Deflections: For required pressures and loads, limit deflections and stresses to wall louver work as
follows, except restrict deflection further as required for performance and assembly of components:
a. Normal: For both positive and negative pressures and loads acting normal to plane of louvers,
deflecting of framing members or components shall not exceed 1/240 of span length.
b. Interaction Stresses: Stresses shall take into account interaction, including allowable values
established by industrial standards. In no case shall allowable values exceed yield stress.
5. Movements: Meet requirements of Section 01415 - Performance Requirements.
6. Corrosion: Where dissimilar materials east in a relationship or environment where galvanic or other
types of corrosion or deterioration could occur, provide appropriate measures to prevent such
corrosion or deterioration at places within and adjacent to work.
7. Design Configuration: Outdoor louvers, and indoor louvers located in same room or space, each
shall be of one design type, except as otherwise indicated by Contract Documents.
8. Performance:
a. Free Area: Free air area of louvers shall be such as not to reduce design air movement through
louvers and not to generate noise from design volume of air passing through louvers. Free air
area of louvers shall be calculated meeting requirements of AMCA 500.
b. Performance - AMCA 500: Performance of louvers based on AMCA 500 shall be required as
specified for respective louver; determined by testing 48 inch wide by 48 inch high (gross area)
louver unit.
c. Outdoor Louvers - AMCA Certification: Each louver unit located in outdoor wall shall meet
requirements of AMCA 500 and AMCA Certification Ratings Program, and bear AMCA Certified
Rating Seal.
AESI 27210 WALL LOUVERS 10210 -2
18JAN08
•
U
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Responsibility: Work shall be performed by a single installer having undivided responsibility for
providing complete work and for performance, quality and experience of work.
B. Product Qualifications: Provide louvers from a single manufacturer where alike in one or more respects
with regard to type, design and factory applied color finish.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: One of acceptable manufacturers specked in Part 2 of this Section.
D. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall specialize in performing work of this Section and have 5 years
minimum documented experience in engineering, detailing, fabrication, installation and maintenance of
extent, type and quality required for work and shall be acceptable to manufacturer. Upon request,
provide proof of qualifications.
E. Engineer of Contractor Qualifications: Professional engineer of Contractor licensed to practice in
jurisdiction where the Work is located and experienced in providing structural engineering services that
have resulted in successful installation and performance of work similar in extent, design and products
to that required for the work.
F. Welding Qualifications:
1. General: Prior to commencement of welding operations, qualify welding procedures and personnel
to be employed on fabrication and installation work meeting requirements of AWS D1.1.
El
2. Personnel: Qualifications shall remain in effect for duration of work, unless there is reason on part
of Quality Control Service to question ability of welding personnel. Verification of qualifications of
welding personnel required for work shall be performed by Quality Control Service at expense of
Contractor, at no addition to Contract Sum.
G. Allowable Tolerances: Completed louver work shall be within following tolerances:
1. Location Variation: Deviation from theoretical or designed position in horizontal or vertical plane,
including deviation from plumb, level or dimensioned angle, shall not exceed 1/4 inch total at any
location. Change in deviation shall not exceed 1/8 inch for any 12 foot run in any direction.
2. Alignment: Deviation from plumb, level or dimensioned angle shall not exceed 1/8 inch in any 12
feet of actual length of any member and 1/4 inch in any total run in any line, whichever is less.
3. Plane Alignment Offsets: Limit offsets from true alignment between consecutive or adjoining
members placed end -to -end or edge -to -edge in same plane as follows:
a. Maximum offset of 1/32 inch for required flush alignments, including any alignment to be 1/4 inch
or less out -of -flush and any separation by a reveal or protrusion in plane of 2 inches or less.
b. Ma)amum offset of 1/16 inch for required out -of -flush alignments, including any alignment to be
more than 1/4 inch out -of -flush and any separation by a reveal or protrusion in plane of more
than 2 inches.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
AESI 27210 WALL LOUVERS
18JAN08
10210 -3
G �
A. Product Data: Submit product specifications, technical data, standard detail drawings and installation
instructions for each product required for work. Include published data, certified conformance report or
certified laboratory test report substantiating products and finishes meet requirements of Contract
Documents.
1. Submit certified test reports of performance tests for each type louver including compliance with
applicable reference standards and requirements of Contract Documents.
2. Submit warranty of manufacturer for factory applied finish.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. General: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of wall louvers and accessories.
Include plans, elevations, sections and details showing dimensions of louver units related to wall
openings and adjacent construction; profiles of frames at jambs, heads and sills; profiles, angles
and spacing of louver blades, and free area for each louver unit.
2. Certification: Shop drawings for wall louver work required to meet structural performance
requirements indicated by Contract Documents shall be certified and sealed bylicensed engineerof
Contractor.
C. Samples:
1. General: Submit manufacturer standard size samples of each type finish required prepared on
same alloy and thickness of metal as required for work. Where finishes involve color and texture
variations, include sample sets showing full range of variations expected. Samples shall show
extremes of pattern, texture, color and distortions. Samples will be reviewed only for visual
characteristics.
2. Design and Techniques: Right is reserved to require full size samples which show design and
fabrication of exposed components, accessories and auxiliary items before fabrication of this work
proceeds. Samples will be reviewed only for information.
D. Structural Calculations:
1. General: Submit structural calculations for work required to meet structural performance
requirements indicated by Contract Documents, prepared in accordance with good and prudent
structural engineering theory and current design practice and in accordance with appropriate design
standards. Submittal will be only for information.
2. Analysis: Calculation shall include analysis for required loads on supporting structure, including
performance requirements specified in Paragraph - Performance Requirements, of this Section,
and resultant reactions at each connection point to supporting structure. Show section property
computations for framing members. Existing test reports, data from other projects, or untried or
unproven theories will not be acceptable.
3. Calculations shall be certified and sealed by engineer of Contractor stating work meets most
stringent requirements of Contract Documents.
E. Welding Qualifications: Submit qualifications for welding procedures and personnel which document
meeting requirements of Contract Documents. Include qualification test records. Indicate any
limitations to qualifications. Submittals will be only for information.
F. Test Reports: Submit test reports of each test for louver work. Each report shall be certified by party
AESI 27210 WALL LOUVERS 10210 -4
18JAN08
•
conducting or supervising test.
G. Compliance Certificates: Submit compliance certificates for louvers, issued by manufacturer attesting
each louver meets requirements of Contract Documents and, when applicable, are licensed to bear
AMCA Seal based on tests performed meeting requirements of AMCA 500 and requirements of AMCA
Certified Ratings Program. Compliance certificate shall be signed by manufacturer and meet
applicable requirements of Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. General: Wall louvers shall be delivered stored and handled meeting instructions of manufacturer so
as not to be damaged or deformed.
B. Shop Assembly. Preassemble wall louver work in shop to minimize splicing and assembly at project
site. Disassemble units only to extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark
units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
C. Built -In Items: Promptly deliver accessories to be built -in supporting construction. Furnish final
reviewed shop drawings, templates and instructions for installation of built -in items.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. General: Warranty work meeting provisions of Conditions of the Contract, except warranty shall include
additional requirements of this Article.
B. Coverage: Defective materials and workmanship shall include, but not be limited to, abnormal
deterioration and failure of the work to meet performance requirements indicated by Contract
Documents.
11
C. Costs: Warranty shall be without cost limitation and at no expense to Owner.
D. Signatures: Warranty shall be signed by Contractor, installer and manufacturer.
E. Time Period: Extend warranty time period as follows:
1. PVDF Finishes: 20 years for coil application and 10 years for spray application.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Air Flow Company, Inc.
B. The Airolite Co.
C. American Warming and Ventilating.
D. Construction Specialties, Inc.
E. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
F. Reliable Metal Products, Inc.
G. Ruskin Manufacturing.
2.02 MATERIALS
0 AESI 27210 WALL LOUVERS
18JAN08
10210 -5
A. Structural Hot - Rolled Steel Plate, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A572, Grade 50 minimum, ASTM A992 or
ASTM A36.
B. Steel Tubing - Hot Formed: ASTM A501.
C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM 8209, Alloy 3003 or 5005, temper as required for forming and recommended
by metal producer for required finish.
D. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM 8221, Alloy 6063 -T5 or T52.
E. Fasteners: Same material as items to be fastened, unless otherwise required. Fasteners for exterior
applications may be hot -dip zinc coated, stainless steel or aluminum as applicable. Provide types,
gages and lengths to suit installation conditions. Use oval -head machine screws with Phillips drive slot
for exposed fasteners.
F. Anchors and Inserts: Type, size and material required for type of loading and installation required. Use
hot -dip zinc coated or stainless steel anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as
required for corrosion resistance. Use steel expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors.
Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into supporting construction.
G. Steel Primer - Alkyd Gray:
1. Description: Modified alkyd rust - inhibitive primer, lead and chromate free, 54 percent minimum
solids by volume, 2.8 Ibs/gal (331 g /L) maximum VOC unthinned, non - immersion service, meeting
USDA and FDA acceptability regulations, gray color, flat sheen finish.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. Carboline Company: Multi-Bond, Gray.
b. Tnemec Company, Inc., Series 10 Tnemec Primer, 1009 Gray.
H. Steel Primer - Inorganic Zinc Coating:
Description: Two component, moisture cured inorganic zinc -rich silicate primer, to be used as
single topcoat or in conjunction with topcoats, 63 percent minimum solids by volume, 79 percent
minimum zinc content by weight in dry film, 4.0 Ibs /gal (485 g /L) maximum VOC unthinned, non -
immersion service, flat sheen finish, meeting requirements of SSPC PS12.01, and USDAand FDA
acceptability regulations. Paint shall meet requirements of RCSC Bolt Specification for Class B
Coating which provides a mean slip coefficient of 0.50 minimum and tension creep of 0.005 inch
maximum.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. Carboline Company, Carbo Zinc 11.
b. Tnemec Company, Inc., 90E -92 Tneme -Zinc.
I. Repair Paints:
1. Alkyd Primer Coating: Same paint as specified for primer.
2. Zinc Coatings:
1E
AESI 27210 WALL LOUVERS 10210 -6
18JAN08
a. Zinc Coating - Hot -Dip:
1) Description: Zinc -rich paint for repair of damaged areas of hot -dip zinc coated steel
surfaces meeting requirements of ASTM A780, SSPC Paint 20 and USDOD P -21035 with
94 percent minimum zinc dust by weight in dry film.
2) Acceptable Products:
a) ZRC Chemical Products Co., Z.R.C. Cold Galvanized Compound.
b. Zinc Coating - Painted: Same paint as specified for primer for inorganic zinc coating.
J. Finish Coating Materials: Meet requirements of Article - Finishes, of this Section.
K. Sealant: Polyurethane sealant and associated materials meeting requirements of Section 07920 -Joint
Sealants.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Fabricate wall louvers to meet requirements required for design, performance, dimensions,
materials and joinery.
2. Use materials of size and thicknesses required to provide adequate strength and durability in
finished product. Work to dimensions required using proven details of fabrication and support. Use
type of materials required for various components.
D"
3. Braking: Fabricate sheet metal louvers by press braking.
B. Frames: Fabricate frames, including integral sills and recessed calking slots, to fit in openings of size
required with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances of louvers, adjoining
construction and perimeter sealant joints.
C. Blade Spacing: Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades, and blades
and head frame, to provide uniform appearance.
D. Mullions: Provide vertical and horizontal mullions and supports of type and at spacings recommended
by manufacturer. Except as otherwise required, mullions and supports shall be concealed from exterior
view and provide a continuous vertical and horizontal louver blade appearance.
E. Accessories: Include supports, anchorages, flashings and accessories required for complete and
weathertight assembly.
F. Sills: Provide sill extensions and loose sills made of same material as louvers, where required for
drainage to exterior and to prevent water penetrating to interior. Provide ends of sill extension flashing
with end dams.
G. Joining: Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades with welds, mechanical
fasteners or a combination of these methods, concealed from view, as standard with louver
manufacturer, except as otherwise required or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections
between frame members necessary.
2.04 WALL LOUVERS
0 AESI 27210 WALL LOUVERS
18JAN08
10210 -7
E� O
A. General: Refer to other requirements of this Section for wall louvers and to Article - Wall Louver
Schedule, of this Section.
B. Types: Provide wall louvers of types required for respective louver configuration and meeting following
applicable requirements:
1. Box Type Horizontal Drainable Fixed Blade Louvers: Designed to intercept, collect and drain water
to exterior at sill by means of gutter in front edge of each blade and corresponding downspout
channel in each jamb.
2. Angular Gar Grilles
2.05 LOUVER SCREENS
A. General: Provide active areas of each exterior louver with louver screens. Louver screening is not
required where both sides of louver are in same environmental zone.
1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face, except as otherwise required.
2. Screen Type: Bird screening.
B. Frames: Fabricate screen frames with mitered corners to required louver sizes.
1. Type: Non - rewireable U- shaped frames for permanently securing screen mesh.
2. Metal: Same type of metal as required for louver frame to which screen is attached. Reinforce
extruded aluminum screen frames at comers with clips.
3. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached.
C. Louver Screen for Aluminum Louvers: Fit aluminum louver screen frames with screen covering louver
openings.
1. Insect Screening: 18 x 16 mesh woven wire screening formed with 0.011 inch diameter aluminum
wire.
D. Attachment: Attach screens to louver frames with stainless steel sheet metal screws, spaced at each
corner and at uniform spacing of 12 inches maximum centers between.
2.06 BLANK -OFF PANELS
A. General: Provide inactive areas of each exterior louver with blank -off panel.
1. Panel Location: Interior face.
2. Metal: Same type of metal as required for louver frame to which panel is attached.
3. Size: Fabricate panels to required louver sizes, outside perimeter of louver frame.
B. Insulated Blank -Off Panels: Laminated metal faced panels consisting of insulating core surfaced on
back and front with metal sheets and metal edges:
1. Thickness: As required to equal R -value of outdoor wall assembly, but 1 inch minimum.
AESI 27210 WALL LOUVERS 10210 -8
18JAN08
O •
2. Metal Facing Sheets: Aluminum sheet, 0.032 inch minimum thickness.
3. Insulating Core: Extruded polystyrene insulation board insulation meeting requirements of ASTM
C578, Type IV.
4. Edge Treatment: Trim perimeter edges of blank -off panels with extruded aluminum channel
frames of 0.063 inch minimum thickness, with corners mitered.
5. Finish: Same type as louver frames to which panels are attached, except color shall be black.
6. Seal perimeterjoints between panel faces and louver frames with polyvinyl chloride compression
gaskets, 1/8" x 1 ".
C. Attachment: Attach blank -off panels to louver frames with stainless steel sheet metal screws, spaced
at each comer and at uniform spacing of 12 inches maximum centers between.
2.07 FINISHES
A. General:
1. Finish: Meet requirements and recommendations of NAAMM - Metal Finishes Manual relative to
finishes required. Factory finish metal components providing required type finish. Metal finish
surfaces exposed in the completed work shall match final review samples. Coordinate metal
finishes of metal wall louver work components to assure uniform quality and finish, including color,
textures and sheen.
2. System Qualifications: Application of each finish system shall be qualified by finish manufacturer.
Provide certification that applicator is acceptable to finish manufacturer and that process, including
surface preparation and pretreatment, and coating applications and curing, is in accordance with
spec cations of finish manufacturer.
3. Repair: Repair or touch -up of finished surfaces shall be as specified in Article - Adjusting and
Cleaning, of this Section.
B. Required Schedule: Provide metal components with respective type finish as follows and meeting
requirements for type of finish as specified in this Article:
1. Concealed Ferrous Metal:
a. General: Prime paint protective coating.
b. Internal Framing Reinforcement: Zinc coating.
2. Exposed Aluminum - PVDF: PVDF finish, solid color.
C. Ferrous Metal Coatings:
1. General: Provide coating after completing fabrication of respective component or assembly.
2. Prime Paint: Prime paint exposed surfaces and initial 2 inches of embedded areas. Prepare
surfaces meeting requirements of SSPC SP3. Apply prime paint meeting requirements of SSPC
PA1 and prime paint manufacturer instructions. Paint coat shall be uniform and 3.0 mils minimum
dry film thickness.
AESI 27210 WALL LOUVERS 10210 -9
18JAN08
11�
3. Zinc Coating - Hot -Dip: Hot -dip zinc coating meeting requirements of ASTM Al23 and ASTM A153,
as applicable.
4. Zinc Coating - Painted: 1 J
a. General: Shop prime paint steel fabrications with primer for steel painted inorganic zinc coating,
except as otherwise required.
b. Exclusions: Do not paint following surfaces of metal fabrications:
1) Members or surfaces of non - ferrous metal.
2) Surfaces and edges to be field welded.
c. Surface Preparation: Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before primer coat is
applied. Clean off rust, mill scale slag or fluxdeposits, and like material meeting requirements
of SSPC SP -6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminates
meeting requirements of SSPC SP -1, Solvent Cleaning.
d. Application:
1) Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer paint meeting instructions of
manufacturer and requirements of SSPC PA -1. Apply primer paint at a rate to provide a
uniform dry film thickness of 3.0 mils minimum for each coat required, except provide
greater dry film thickness when recommended by paint manufacturer. Coating shall provide
full coverage over joints, comers, edges and exposed surfaces. Strip paint edges, comers,
crevices, bolts, welds and like conditions.
2) Apply one shop coat of primer to surfaces of metal fabricated items, except apply two coats
of paint to surfaces which will be inaccessible after assembly or erection.
D. PVDF Finish: Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) finish shall be high performance, heavy duty, resin finish
system. Finish coats shall contain 70 percent minimum by weight of PVDF resin, Arkema Inc., Kynar
500, or Solvay Solexis, Hylar 5000.
1. Performance: Finish system shall meet requirements of AAMA 2605.2 and for 20 years minimum
period service life shall not chalk more than ASTM D4214, Method A, Number 8 Rating, not change
color more than 5 A E Hunter units when evaluated meeting requirements of ASTM D2244, and not
check, craze or peel. In addition, finish system shall meet performance criteria and data indicated in
current system specifications of specified finish manufacturer.
2. Applications:
a. Coil: Use coil application finish system for steel sheet substrates.
b. Spray: Use spray application finish system for extrusion substrates.
3. Color: Conventional colors, except bright and metallic colors, of finish manufacturer as selected by
Architect.
4. Texture: Smooth finish.
2.08 WALL LOUVER SCHEDULE
AESI 27210 WALL LOUVERS 10210 -10
18JAN08
0
A. General:
0
1. Types: Provide louvers of type required as indicated in this Schedule, consisting of subsequent
Paragraphs.
2. Designations: Wall louver designations specified in this Schedule correspond to designations
indicated by Contract Documents. Schedule does not reflect louver sizes, anchoring methods or
screening.
B. Wall Louver WL -1 - Horizontal Drainable Fixed Blade (Typical for exposed to public view locations):
Frames and blades of type, construction, configuration and performance required, with supporting
framework concealed from view from outside face of louver by placing braces, mullions and brackets
on inside face; with close fitting joints; meeting following requirements:
1. Type: Box type horizontal drainable fixed blade louver with gutters and downspout channels. Basis
of design, Greenheck
2. Construction: Extruded aluminum.
3. Finish: Kynar 500 / Hylar 5000, AAMA 2604, color as selected by Architect.
4. Configuration:
a. Louver Depth: 4 inches.
b. Frame Type: Inverted channel type configuration with flanges outward from blade area. Provide
with downspouts, sill flashing and perimeter calking slots.
c. Blade Profile: Z- profile with gutters.
d. Blade Angle: 45 degrees approximately.
e. Frame and Blade Thickness: 0.125 inch minimum aluminum.
f. Birdscreen: 'h in. x' /z in. 19 ga. Galvanized steel in removable frame.
5. Performance: Meet requirements of Article - System Description, of this Section, and following and
shall bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal:
a. Free Area: 50 percent minimum of gross area.
b. Static Pressure Loss: 0.15 inch water gage maximum at an airflow of 1,000 feet per minute free
area intake velocity.
c. Water Penetration: 0.01 ounces per square foot maximum of free area at an airflow of 1,000 feet
per minute free air velocity when tested for 15 minutes.
6. Performance Certification: AMCA 500.
C. Wall Louver WL -2 -Horizontal Drainable Fixed Blade (for mechanical, interior or concealed locations):
Frames and blades of type, construction, configuration and performance required, with supporting
framework concealed from view from outside face of louver by placing braces, mullions and brackets
on inside face; with close fitting joints; meeting following requirements:
1. Type: Box type horizontal drainable fixed blade louver with gutters and downspout channels. Basis
of design, Greenheck FDS -402
2. Construction: Galvanized Steel.
3. Finish: Mill
0 AESI 27210 WALL LOUVERS 10210 -11
18JAN08
1111110 J
4. Configuration:
a. Louver Depth: 4 inches.
b. Frame Type: 16 gauge galvanized steel.
c. Blade Angle: 45 degrees approximately.
d. Frame and Blade Thickness: 0.20 gauge minimum galvanized steel.
e. Birdscreen: % in. x % in. 19 ga. Galvanized steel in removable frame.
5. Performance: Meet requirements of Article -System Description, of this Section, and following and
shall bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal:
a. Free Area: 50 percent minimum of gross area.
b. Static Pressure Loss: 0.15 inch water gage maximum at an airflow of 1,000 feet per minute free
area intake velocity.
c. Water Penetration: 0.01 ounces per square foot maximum of free area at an airflowof 1,000 feet
per minute free air velocity when tested for 15 minutes.
6. Performance Certification: AMCA 500.
D. Wall Louver WL -3 Angular Bar Grille (For protected ceiling locations in exposed to public view
locations): Frames and blades of type, construction, configuration and performance required, with
supporting framework concealed from view from outside face of louver by placing braces, mullions and
brackets on inside face; with close fitting joints; meeting following requirements:
1. Type: Box type angular bar grille
2. Construction: Extruded aluminum.
3. Finish: Kynar 500 / Hylar 5000, AAMA 2604, color as selected by Architect.
4. Configuration:
a. Grille Depth: 4 inches.
b. Frame Type: Inverted channel type configuration with flanges outward from blade area.
c. Blade Profile: Rectangular bar.
d. Horizontal bar angle: 45 degrees
e. Horizontal bar spacing: 3 inches.
f. Vertical bar spacing: 3 inches.
g. Frame and Blade Thickness: 0.125 inch minimum aluminum.
5. Performance: Meet requirements of Article -System Description, of this Section, and following and
shall bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal:
a. Free Area: 50 percent minimum of gross area.
b. Static Pressure Loss: 0.15 inch water gage maximum at an airflow of 1,000 feet per minute free
area intake velocity.
c. Water Penetration: 0.01 ounces per square foot maximum of free area at an airflowof 1,000 feet
per minute free air velocity when tested for 15 minutes.
6. Performance Certification: AMCA 500.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
AESI 27210 WALL LOUVERS 10210 -12 ,
18JAN08
0 9
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be installed for compliance with
requirements of Contract Documents and to determine if conditions affecting performance are
satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved.
Commencement of installation shall constitute acceptance of conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install work meeting requirements of Contract Documents, as indicated by final reviewed
submittals for work, and meeting instructions and recommendations of product manufacturers. Consult
with manufacturers for conditions not covered by published instructions.
B. Placement: Locate and place louver units plumb, level and in proper alignment with adjacent work.
C. Joints: Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide perimeter reveals
and openings for sealants and joint fillers as required.
D. Anchorages: Use concealed anchorages wherever possible. Provide appropriate type washers fitted to
screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
E. Dissimilar Materials: Separate dissimilar materials and other sources of corrosion, including electrolytic
corrosion, by providing separators which will prevent corrosion. Do not extend materials onto surfaces
exposed in the completed Work, except as otherwise acceptable to Architect.
F. Accessories: Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers and insulations, and install as work
progresses to make installations weathertight.
G. Sealant Joints: Sealant work shall meet requirements of Section 07920 - Joint Sealants. Provide
intermittent weep holes in sill calking to permit drainage.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Operable Components: Adjust and lubricate as applicable operable components of work to function
properly, without binding, and to provide proper fit at interface areas within required tolerances.
B. Protective Covering: Remove any temporary protective covering provided by manufacturer at time of
Substantial Completion, except as otherwise instructed by manufacturer.
C. Restoration:
1. General: Restore work damaged so no evidence remains of correction work. If results of
restoration are not acceptable to Architect, replace with new finish units.
2. Coatings: Clean and touch -up minor abrasions in finishes with air -dried coating that is compatible
with and matches type, color and sheen of factory applied finish and blends with initial surface.
D. Cleaning:
1. Clean exposed surfaces after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to finish surfaces.
Remove protective material from prefinished surfaces, labels, excess sealant, dirt and other
substances. Remove dirt from corners. Do not allow soils to accumulate until final cleaning.
2. Cleaning materials and methods shall meet instructions and recommendations of manufacturer
AESI 27210 WALL LOUVERS 10210 -13
18JAN08
LIWA
and shall not be detrimental to materials and shall promote achievement of uniform appearance.
3. Maintain work in a clean condition throughout construction period, so that it will be without
deterioration and damage (other than normal weathering) at time of acceptance. Immediately
before time of final completion clean thoroughly inside and out.
END OF SECTION
PE
AESI 27210 WALL LOUVERS 10210 -14
18JAN08
0
TORCHIA ASSOCIATES, INC.
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
9
1. Wood lockers with raised -panel and louver, solid wood doors.
2. Locker benches.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
SECTION 10506
WOOD LOCKERS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for wood lockers.
1. Include data for fire- retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
1. Show details full size.
2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specked in other Sections.
3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in wood lockers.
4. Show wood locker fillers, trim, base, sloping tops, and accessories.
5. Show wood locker numbering sequence.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:
1. Factory- applied transparent finishes.
2. High - pressure decorative laminates.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following:
1. Solid wood with transparent finish, not less than 50 sq. in. for each species and cut,
finished on 1 side and 1 edge.
2. Wood-veneer-faced panels with transparent finish, not less than 8 by 10 inches, for each
species and cut. Include at least one face - veneer seam and finish as specified.
3. Plastic - laminate -dad panels, not less than 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each
type, color, pattern, and surface finish.
4. Thermoset decorative - overlay- surfaced panels, not less than 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250
mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.
5. Corner pieces of wood locker front frame joints between stiles and rail, as well as
exposed end pieces, not less than 18 inches (450 mm) high by 18 inches (450 mm) wide
by 6 inches (150 mm) deep.
6. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type.
E. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
F. Research /Evaluation Reports: Showing that fire- retardant - treated wood complies with building
code in effect for Project.
G. Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing wood locker doors and latching
mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals.
TORCHIA WOOD LOCKERS
18JAN08
�:
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain wood lockers through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of wood
lockers and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
data to Architect for review.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Where wood lockers are indicated to comply with accessibility
requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural $ Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's
"Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
(ADAAG). ", A.N.S.I. /ICC Al 17.1., FED -STD -795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards."
1. Provide not less than one shelf located within required reach ranges.
2. Provide hardware that does not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist,
and that operates with a force of not more than 5 Ibf (22.2 N).
E. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Where fire- retardant materials are indicated, provide
materials with specified fire -test- response characteristics as determined by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency on surfaces of materials that
will be concealed from view after installation.
F. Forest Certification: Provide wood lockers made from wood obtained from forests certified by
an FSC- accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria."
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver wood lockers until painting and similar operations that could damage wood
lockers have been completed in installation areas. If wood lockers must be stored in other -than-
installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions are same as that in final
installation location and comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.
B. Deliver combination control charts to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood lockers until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood lockers until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature between 60 and
90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 17 and 50 percent during the
remainder of the construction period.
TORCHIA WOOD LOCKERS 10506 -2
18JAN08
0 •
C. Field Measurements: Verify concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support wood
lockers by field measurements before being enclosed and before wood locker fabrication, and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concealed wood support bases.
1. Requirements are specked in Division 6 Section "Architectural Woodwork"
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood lockers can be supported and
installed as indicated.
C. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in
Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" to fabricator of wood lockers; coordinate Shop Drawings
and fabrication with hardware requirements.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of wood lockers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures.
2. Faulty operation of locks or hardware.
3. Deterioration of wood, wood finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
D
B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before construction begins, that match products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Full -size wood locker doors, complete with specified door hardware. Furnish not less
than 5 doors of each type and color installed.
2. Full -size units of the following wood locker hardware items equal to 10 percent of amount
installed for each type and finish installed, but no fewer than 5 units.
a. Hinges.
b. Pulls.
C. Shelf rests.
d. Cylinder and drawer locks.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product
or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Classic Woodworking, Inc.
TORCHIA WOOD LOCKERS
18JAN08
10506 -3
2. Dimension Millworks.
3. Famous Lockers.
4. Fiberesin Industries, Inc.
5. Hollman, Inc.
6. Ideal Products, Inc.
7. Multispace; Div. of Club Resource Group.
8. Treeforms.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Solid Wood:
1. Exposed Locations: Clear hardwood lumber, selected for compatible grain and color.
2. Semiexposed Locations: Sound hardwood lumber, selected to eliminate appearance
defects, of dear white oak exposed solid wood.
3. Concealed Locations: Any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects affecting
strength or utility.
B. Medium - Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD- Exterior Glue.
C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M- 2- Exterior Glue, minimum 45-lb/cu. ft. (720 - kg/cu. m)
density.
D. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.
E. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP -1, Type I, made with adhesive containing no urea
formaldehyde.
F. Hardwood Face Veneers: HPVA HP -1, Grade A. 1J
G. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M -2, or
medium - density fiberboard complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, with surface of thermally
fused, melamine- impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT -1.
1. Provide material made from particleboard or medium - density fiberboard made without
urea formaldehyde.
H. High - Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as follows:
1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGL.
2. Postformed Surfaces: HGP.
3. Vertical Surfaces: VGS.
4. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering high - pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
5. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high - pressure
decorative laminates by one of the following:
a. Avonite, Inc.
b. Formica Corporation.
C. International Paper; Decorative Products Div.
d. Lamin -Art.
e. Pioneer Plastics Corp.
f. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div.
TORCHIA WOOD LOCKERS 10506 -4 vi
18JAN08
0 •
g. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage.
1. Provide nonferrous -metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of
exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance.
2. Provide toothed -steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled -in -place anchors.
K. Concealed Wood Support Base: 2 -by-6 -inch nominal- (38- by- 140-mm actual- size, preservative -
treated lumber.
2.3 WOOD- PRESERVATIVE - TREATED MATERIALS
A. Water - Repellent Preservative Treatment by Nonpressure Process: AWPA N1.
Preservative Chemicals: 3- iodo- 2- propynyl butyl carbamate (IPBC).
B. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber), except that lumber that is
continuously protected from liquid water shall be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic
boron (SBX).
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Do not use chemical formulations that require incising.
3. Kiln -dry material after treatment to levels required for untreated material. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
4. Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency
approved by the American Lumber Standards' Committee Board of Review.
2.4 FIRE - RETARDANT - TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where indicated, use materials impregnated with fire- retardant chemical formulations
indicated by a pressure process or other means acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to
produce products with fire -test- response characteristics specified.
1. Do not use treated material that does not comply with requirements of referenced
woodworking standard or that is warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.
2. Use fire - retardant- treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise
adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated material
from untreated material.
B. Fire - Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from
softwood particles and fire- retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to
achieve flame - spread index of 25 or less and smoke - developed index of 25 or less per
ASTM E 84.
For panels 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M -2
except for the following minimum properties: density, 45 lb/cu. ft (720 kg/cu. m); modulus
of rupture, 1600 psi (11 MPa); modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi (2000 MPa); internal
bond, 80 psi (550 kPa); and screw - holding capacity on face and edge, 250 Ibf (1100 N)
and 225 Ibf (1000 N), respectively.
TORCHIA WOOD LOCKERS 10506 -5
18JAN08
D 4
2. For panels 13/16 to 1 -1/4 inches (20 to 32 mm) thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for
Grade M -1 except for the following minimum properties: density, 44 lb/cu. ft (705 kg/cu.
m); modulus of rupture, 1300 psi (9 MPa); modulus of elasticity, 250,000 psi (1700 MPa);
linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 Ibf
(1100 N) and 175 1 b (780 N), respectively.
3. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Duraflake FR" by Willamette
Industries, Inc.
C. Fire - Retardant Fiberboard: Medium - density fiberboard panels complying with ANSI A208.2,
made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire- retardant chemicals mixed together at time
of panel manufacture to achieve flame- spread index of 25 or less and smoke - developed index
of 200 or less per ASTM E 84.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Medite FR" by SierraPine
Limited; Medite Div.
2.5 WOOD LOCKER HARDWARE
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard wood locker hardware and accessories complying
with the following:
B. General: Provide wood locker hardware and accessories, complying with the following, except
for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
C. Frameless Hinges (European Type): Fully concealed, self- dosing, nickel - plated steel, with not
less than 125 degrees of opening.
1. Provide 2 hinges for doors 36 inches tall and less.
2. Provide 3 hinges for doors more than 36 inches tall.
D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted; 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter.
E. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, 804013.
F. Exposed Hardware Finishes: Satin stainless, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Exposed Hardware Finishes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1.
2. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
2.6 DOOR LOCKS
A. General: Fabricate wood lockers to receive locking devices. Provide one locking device for
each wood locker door, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Cam Padlock Hasp: Surface mounted, steel; finished to match other wood locker hardware.
2.7 WOOD -FACED WOOD LOCKERS
A. Construction Style: Reveal overlay.
1. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
TORCHIA WOOD LOCKERS 10506 -6
18JAN08
0 •
B. Locker Body: Fabricated from fire- resistant - particleboard core panels covered on both sides
with thermoset decorative overlay.
1. Side Panels: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick.
2. Top Panel: 34 inch (19 mm) thick.
3. Bottom Panel: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick.
4. Exposed Panel Edges: Solid wood to match doors.
C. Raised - Panel, Solid Wood and Louver Doors: 3/4 -inch- (19 -mm -) thick, solid wood stiles and
rails with 3/4 -inch- (19 -mm -) thick, solid wood center panels; fabricated to allow center panel
movement. Provide wood species and cut as follows:
Red oak, quarter sawn.
D. Shelves: Fabricated from fire- resistant- particleboard-core panels covered on both sides with
thermoset decorative overlay; fixed
1. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm)
2. Exposed Edges: Solid wood to match doors.
E. Corners and Filler Panels: Wood-veneer-faced, 3/4 -inch- (19 -mm -) thick panel that matches
door faces.
F. Grain Matching: Run and match grain vertically for doors and fixed panels
G. Veneer Matching:
Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match.
0 , 2.8 LOCKER ACCESSORIES
A. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball - pointed, aluminum or steel; finished to match other wood
locker hardware. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners.
1. Provide one double -prong ceiling hook and two single -prong wall hooks for each
compartment of wood lockers.
B. Coat Rods: 1 -inch- (25 -mm) diameter steel; finished to match other wood locker hardware.
1. Provide coat rod for each compartment of wood lockers.
C. Number Plates: 1 -1/2 -inch- (38 -mm -) diameter, etched, embossed, or stamped, stainless steel
plates with black numbers and letters at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) high. Identify wood lockers in
sequence indicated on Drawings. Finish plates to match other wood locker hardware.
D. Continuous Finish Base: Laminate -faced, 3/4 -inch- (19 -mm -) thick panel that matches door
faces; fabricated in lengths as long as practicable to enclose base and base ends of wood
lockers.
2.9 LOCKER BENCHES
A. Pedestal -Leg Locker Benches: Bench supported by pedestal legs, minimum of two pedestals
for each bench; with overall bench height of 18 inches (457 mm); as follows:
1. Metal Pedestal Legs: 3 -inch- diameter, stainless -steel round pipe
2. Bench: 1 -1/2 inches (32 mm) deep by 12 inches (305 mm) wide with rounded edges,
and fabricated as follows:
TORCHIA WOOD LOCKERS 10506 -7
18JAN08
TW
a. Laminated Solid Wood: Match material and finish of wood -faced wood locker
doors.
3. Length: As shown on plans
2.10 WOOD LOCKER FABRICATION
A. Unit Principle: Fabricate each wood locker with an individual door and frame, individual top,
bottom, back, and shelves, and common intermediate uprights separating compartments.
1. Fabricate wood lockers to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
2. Ease edges of corners of solid wood members to radius of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
B. Fabricate components square, rigid, without warp, and with finished faces flat and free of
scratches and chips. Accurately machine components for attachments in factory, with no chips.
Make joints tight and true.
1. Fabricate wood lockers using manufacturer's standard construction with joints made with
dowels, dados, or rabbets. Dado side panels to receive shelving, except where indicated
to be adjustable.
2. Fabricate wood lockers using European 32 -mm doweled and glued construction.
3. Fabricate wood lockers with joints that are dadoed or rabbeted, glued full length, and
stapled. Dado side panels to receive shelving, except where indicated to be adjustable.
4. Join drawer subfronts, backs, and sides with manufacturer's standard glued joints.
5. Join drawer subfronts, backs, and sides with glued dovetail joints
C. Number Plates: Inlay number plates flush in each wood locker door, near top, centered.
D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum
extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary
for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be
removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check
measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings
before disassembling for shipment.
E. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, electrical work, and
similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to
produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and
burrs.
2.11 FACTORY FINISHES FOR WOOD -FACED WOOD LOCKERS
A. General: Finish wood lockers at factory as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup,
cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
B. Preparations for Finishing: Sand, fill countersunk fasteners, seal concealed surfaces, and
perform similar preparations for finishing wood lockers, as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of wood lockers. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end -
TORCHIA WOOD LOCKERS 10506 -8
18JAN08
0
grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic - laminate -clad wood lockers do not require
backpriming when surfaced with thermoset decorative overlay or plastic laminate.
C. Transparent Finish: Manufacturer's standard two -coat, clear, catalyzed lacquer finish with
sanding between coats. Seal with moisture - resistant topcoat.
1. Stain: Match approved sample for color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls, floors, and wood bases for suitable conditions where wood lockers will be
installed.
B. Verify that furring is attached to concrete and masonry walls that are to receive wood lockers.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Condition wood lockers to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installation.
B. Before installing wood lockers, examine factory fabricated work for completeness and complete
work as required, including removal of packing.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install concealed wood support base
B. Assemble knocked -down wood lockers with manufacturer's standard fasteners, with no
exposed fasteners on face frames.
C. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.
D. Connect groups of wood lockers together with manufacturer's standard fasteners, through
predrilled holes, with no exposed fasteners on face frames. Fit wood lockers accurately
together to form flush, tight, hairline joints.
E. Install wood lockers without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1. Installation Tolerance: No more than 1/8 inch in 96 -inch (3 mm in 2400 -mm) sag, bow, or
other variation from a straight line. Shim as required with concealed shims.
2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of wood -faced wood lockers with transparent finish.
3. Fasten wood lockers through back, near top and bottom, at ends with pan -head sheet
metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish spaced not more
than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
4. Fasten wood lockers through wood locker base, at ends and not more than 36 inches
(910 mm) o.c. with No. 8 Stainless steel, flush -head wood screws sized for 1 -inch (25-
mm) penetration into wood base.
4 1 TORCHIA WOOD LOCKERS
18JAN08
10506 -9
�+ Q
F. Scribe and cut corner and filler panels to fit adjoining work using fasteners concealed where
practical. Repair damaged finish at cuts.
G. Attach sloping top units to wood lockers, with end panels covering exposed ends.
H. Number Plates: Install plates after wood lockers are in place.
1. Attach number plate on each wood locker door, near top, centered, with at least two
screws with finish matching number plate.
I. Place freestanding locker benches in locations indicated on Drawings.
J. Anchor locker benches to floors.
1. Uniformly space pedestals not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) apart, and securely
fasten to bench top and anchor to floor.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.
B. Protect wood lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit wood locker
use during construction.
C. Touch up marred finishes, or replace wood lockers that cannot be restored to factory-finished
appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by wood locker
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
TORCHIA WOOD LOCKERS 10506 -10
18JAN08
P1
�11*1
A. EPSTEIN AND SONS INTERNATIONAL, INC.
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
•
SECTION 10520
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
A. Related Documents: Provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of the Contract, Drawings and
Division 1 - General Requirements of the Specification, apply to this Section.
B. Description: Fire protection specialties are indicated by Contract Documents and shall include work
necessary and incidental to completion and performance of the Work.
C. Included: Fire protection includes, but is not limited to, following:
1. Fire extinguishers.
2. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
3. Fire extinguisher mounting brackets.
D. Related Work:
1. Fire protection standpipe and hose systems.
2. Lighting for fire extinguisher location lights.
A
A. Product Data:
1.02 SUBMITTALS
1. General: Submit product specifications, technical data, standard detail drawings and installation
instructions of manufacturer for each product. Include published data, certified conformance report
or certified laboratory test report of manufacturer substantiating proposed products meet
requirements of Contract Documents.
2. Cabinets: For fire protection cabinets include rough -in dimensions, details showing mounting
methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and
materials, trim style, door construction, panel style and materials. Show location of knockouts for
hose valves.
B. Samples -Initial Selection: Submit in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or
sections of units showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of cabinet
finish indicated or exposed to view.
C. Samples -Verification: Submit in full -size units of each type fire protection cabinet finish required, insets
for each color, texture and pattern required, showing full range of variations.
AESI 27210 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
18JAN08
10520 -1
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
C
A. Product Qualification: Provide products indicated under same category from one source produced by
one manufacturer.
B. UL Listed Products: Fire extinguishers shall be UL listed with UL listing mark for type, rating and
classification of extinguisher are satisfactory.
C. FM Listed Products: Fire extinguishers shall be approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation for
type, rating, and classification of extinguisher with FM marking.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Ansul Fire Protection.
B. Badger - Powhatan.
C. American Specialties Inc.
D. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
E. Croker Div., Fire -End and Croker Corp.
F. Filtrine Manufacturing.
G. Lyon Metal Products.
H. J. L. Industries.
I. Larsen's Manufacturing Co.
J. Modern Metal Products by Muckle.
K. Potter - Roemer, Inc.
L. Samson Metal Products, Inc.
2.02 MATERIALS ,
A. General: Provide fire extinguishers for each cabinet and other locations indicated, in colors and finishes
selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard, that comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Fire Extinguishers:
1. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL rated 2- A:10:B:C, 5 lb nominal capacity, in enameled steel
container.
C. Mounting Brackets:
1. Brackets: Designed to prevent accidentally dislodging extinguisher, of sizes required for type and
capacity of extinguisher indicated, in plated finish.
a. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets.
D. Cabinets:
1. Construction: Manufacturer's standard box, with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet
type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter
door frames.
2. Fire Rated Cabinets: UL listed with UL listing mark with fire resistance rating matching rating of wall
AESI 27210 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 -2
18JAN08
• •
where it is installed.
3. Cabinet Type: Suitable for containing following:
a. Fire extinguisher.
b. Fire hose valve.
4. Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for following mounting conditions:
a. Recessed: Cabinet box (tub) fully recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim
indicated.
b. Surface Mounted: Cabinet box (tub) fully exposed and mounted directly on wall.
5. Trim Style: Fabricate trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.
a. Exposed Trim: One piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding
wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).
1) Square edge trim with 1/4 to 5/16 inch backbend depth.
2) Trim Metal: Of same metal and finish as door.
6. Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer's standard door construction, of material indicated,
coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
a. Enameled Steel: Manufacturer's standard finish, hollow steel door construction with tubular
stiles and rails.
b. Stainless Steel: Manufacturer's standard door construction, fabricated from austenitic stainless
steel complying with ASTM Al 67, for AISI Type 302/304 alloy.
c. Door Glazing: Fully tempered float glass complying with ASTM C1048, Condition A, Type I,
Quality q3, Kind FT, .Class as follows:
1) Class 1 (clear).
E. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with FIRE EXTINGUISHER lettering applied to door. Provide lettering
to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location.
1. Application Process: Engraved.
F. Identify bracket mounted extinguishers with FIRE EXTINGUISHER in red letter decals applied to wall
surface. Use letter size, style and location as selected by Architect.
G. Door Style: Manufacturer standard design.
1. Break Glass Panel: Float glass, 1/8 inch thick, with inside latch and lock.
2. Solid Panel: Full flush opaque panel of material indicated.
H. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
10 AESI 27210 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 -3
18JAN08
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam action latch,
or exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous type hinge
permitting door to open 180 deg.
Finishes for cabinets, general:
1. Comply with NAAMM - Metal Finishes Manual for recommendations relative to applying and
designating finishes.
2. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying temporary strippable
protective covering prior to shipping.
J. Steel Cabinet Finishes:
1. Surface Preparation: Solvent clean surfaces complying with SSPS -SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease,
and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from
uncoated steel, complying with SSPC -SP 5 (white metal blast cleaning) or SSPC -SP 8 (pickling).
2. Baked Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreatment, apply manufacturers standard
two coat baked enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Complywith paint
manufacturer's instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0
mils.
a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard choices for color and
gloss. Paint following:
1) Exterior of cabinet, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish.
2) Interior of cabinet.
K. Stainless Steel Cabinet Finishes:
1. Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish.
2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform directional, textured polished finish indicated, free of
cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
a. Polished and Buffed Finish: Fine grit followed by buffing.
b. Bright, Directional Polish: AISI No. 4 finish.
3. Passivate and rinse surfaces after polishing. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces
chemically clean.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be installed, for compliance with
requirements of Contract Documents and to determine if conditions affecting performance of work are
satisfactory. Include examining rough -in for hose vales, hose racks, and cabinets to verify locations of
piping connections prior to cabinet installation. Examine walls and partitions for thickness and framing
for cabinets to verify cabinet depth and mounting prior to cabinet installation. Do not proceed with
W]
AESI 27210 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 -4
18JAN08
0 9
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved. Commencement of installation shall
constitute acceptance of conditions.
:7
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install work meeting requirements of Contract Documents and as indicated by final reviewed
submittals for work, and meeting instructions and recommendations of product manufacturers. Consult
with manufacturers for conditions not covered by printed instructions.
B. Locations: Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated by Contract Documents or, if not
indicated, at heights to meet applicable regulations of authorities bearing on performance of the Work.
C. Wall Recesses: Prepare recesses in walls for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and style
of trim and to comply with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets and cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
E. Fire Rated Hose or Valve Cabinet: Install cabinet with not more than 1/16 inch tolerance between pipe
outside diameter and knockout diameter. Center pipe within knockout.
1. Seal through penetrations with one part firestopping sealant.
END OF SECTION
n*1
AESI 27210 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
18JAN08
10520 -5
D 4
E
9
A. EPSTEIN AND SONS INTERNATIONAL, INC. SECTION 10550
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS POSTAL SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents: Provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of the Contract, Drawings
and Division 1 - General Requirements of the Specification, apply to this Section.
B. Description: Postal specialties are indicated by Contract Documents and shall include work
necessary and incidental to completion and performance of the Work.
C. Included: Postal specialties includes, but is not limited to, following:
1. Horizontal apartment mailboxes.
2. Collection box.
D. Related Work:
1. Door hardware for lock cylinders, keyed to building keying system, for postal specialties.
2. Directories for mailbox directories.
C]
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of following, except to extent of most stringent
requirements of Contract Documents and codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on
performance of the Work:
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product specifications, technical data, standard detail drawings and
installation instructions of manufacturer for each product. Include published data, certified
conformance report or certified laboratory test report of manufacturer substantiating each
proposed product meets requirements of Contract Documents.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. General: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of work, including associated
appurtenances. Include a separate group of shop drawings for test and project site mock -ups.
Organize shop drawings into one coordinated submittal indicating proper relation to adjacent
work. Indicate plans and wall elevations at 1/4 inch scale, typical unit elevations at 3/4 inch
scale and detail sections at full scale. Indicate details and requirements for following and
other pertinent data not included in submitted product data of manufacturer:
a. Layout arrangement and dimensions of work. Indicate arrangement and, where necessary,
details of adjacent construction relative to work, correctly detailed and dimensioned.
b. Reactions and maximum static and dynamic loads imparted by work to supporting
structure, locations of reactions and loads, and proposed connection details for
coordination of supporting structure.
AESI 27210 POSTAL SPECIALTIES
18JAN08
10550 -1
�7 O
c. Identification, location, profiles, sections and dimensions of each material and component,
identification of each material, and type, size and location of reinforcement.
d. Specification for materials.
e. Typical and special details of performance, assembly, installation (erection) and
anchorage.
f. Joinery details, including expansion and contraction provisions with location and sizes, and
weldments, fasteners and sealants. Indicate welded connections by AWS standard
symbols.
g. Lifting devices or points necessary for handling and installation (erection), including
additional reinforcement.
h. Location and details of anchorage devices and inserts, including devices and inserts to be
embedded in or attached to supporting construction. Show types, sizes, location,
shimmying and adjacent materials. Furnish templates if required for accurate placement.
i. Wiring diagrams for electrical power, control, signal and like electrical work. Include wiring
diagrams indicating entire electrical operation and terminal designations.
2. Certification: Shop drawings for work shall be certified and sealed by engineer of Contractor
who performed design work covered by content of shop drawings, stating work meets most
stringent requirements of Contract Documents.
C. Samples - Initial Selection: For units with factory applied color finishes.
D. Samples - Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6" x 6" square
samples.
E. Product Certificates: For each type of postal specialty required to comply with USPS regulations,
signed by product manufacturer.
1. Include written approval by Postmaster General.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer.
G. Maintenance Data: For postal specialties and finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
H. Other Informational Submittals: Final USPS local postmaster approval for installed postal
specialties to be served by USPS.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of postal specialty manufacturer for
installation of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain postal specialties through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of postal
specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. See Section 01610 - Basic Product
Requirements.
AESI 27210 POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10550 -2
18JAN08
• •
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect
approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect
for review.
D. Pre - installation Conference: Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in
Section 01312 - Coordination.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Deliver lock keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service with a record of each
corresponding lock and key number.
B. Deliver combination -lock combinations to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service
with a record of each corresponding lock and combination.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed postal specialties with wall construction.
B. Templates: Obtain and distribute to parties involved templates for installing postal specialties.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of postal specialties that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, following:
a. Structural failures.
b. Faulty operation of hardware, except door locks.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated,
and as follows:
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209.
2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM 8221.
B. Steel Sheet: Cold rolled, ASTM A1008 /A, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
C. Steel Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM F1554, Grade 36 or 55, hot -dip zinc coating.
2.02 HORIZONTAL APARTMENT MAILBOXES
AESI 27210 POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10550 -3
18JAN08
D O
A. USPS Approved, Front - Loading, Horizontal Apartment Mailboxes: Consisting of multiple
compartments with fixed, solid compartment backs, enclosed within recessed wall box. Provide
access to compartments for distributing incoming mail from front of unit by unlocking master lock
and swinging side - hinged master door to provide accessibility to entire group of compartments.
Provide access to each compartment for removing mail by swinging compartment door. Meet
requirements of USPS STD -46.
1. Acceptable Products:
a. Bommer Industries, 6230 Series.
b. Salsbury Industries; 3600 Series or approved equal.
c. Manufacturers listed on USPS Approved Sources List.
2. Mail Delivery: USPS.
3. Compartments: Number and size of compartments as follows:
a. Type A: Inside dimensions minimum 5" high x 5" wide x 16 -1/2" deep, Size B. Provide
147 compartments.
4. Front - Loading Master Door: Fabricated from extruded aluminum and braced and framed to
hold compartment doors; with master door lock and concealed full length, stainless steel
piano hinge on one side. Fabricate master door to remain open while mail is deposited.
a. Master Door Lock: Prepared master door to receive lock furnished by local postmaster.
5. Compartment Doors: Fabricated from aluminum sheet reinforced with vertical stiffeners.
Equip each compartment door with lock, tenant identification, and concealed, full - length, flush
hinge on one side.
a. Tenant Identification: Identification engraved into face of compartment door.
b. Compartment Door Locks: Spring latch type lock housing designed to accommodate
cylinders keyed to building keying system. Provide cylinders specified in Section 08710 -
Door Hardware.
6. Frames: Fabricated from extruded aluminum or aluminum sheet; ganged and nested units,
with cardholder for tenant identification behind each compartment.
a. Provide cardboard identification tab with space for printing tenant name and apartment
number.
7. Snap -on Trim: Fabricated from same material and finish as compartment doors.
8. Concealed Components and Mounting Frames: Aluminum or steel sheet.
9. Aluminum Finish: Finish surfaces exposed to view as follows:
a. Anodic Finish: Clear.
B. Directory: Surface mounted, front opening unit, with clear glass or plastic window. Fabricate
AESI 27210 POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10550 -4
18JAN08
e
0 frame from same material and finish as compartment doors and frames of horizontal apartment
mailboxes, unless otherwise indicated. Provide name strips made of 1/4 inch high label tape.
1. Provide space for 147 names.
C. Directory: Comply with requirements in Section 10410 - Directories.
2.03 COLLECTION BOXES
A. USPS Approved, Front Loading, Collection Boxes: Consisting of single compartment with fire
resistant cushion bottom, enclosed within wall box, with mail slot to receive mail. Provide access
to compartment for collecting mail from front of unit. Comply with USPS Publication 16.
1. Acceptable Products:
a. Auth - Florence Manufacturing Co..
b. Bommer Industries, Inc.
c. Cutler Manufacturing Corporation, Collection Box 5770.
d. Salsbury Industries, Model 2245.
e. Security Manufacturing Corporation, Model C/B 6004.
f. U.S. Chutes, Model 365D, MBI.
g. Manufacturers listed on USPS Approved Sources List.
2. Mounting: Recessed.
3. Type: Auxiliary collection box.
4. Overall Height: As indicated on Drawings.
5. Compartment Door and Frame: Fabricated from 1/4 inch thick metal plate, with opening not
less than 12" x 20" minimum and 18" x 30" maximum. Equip door with lock and concealed,
full length, flush hinge on one side.
a. Door Lock: Door prepared to receive lock furnished by local postmaster.
6. Mail Slot: Fabricated from 1/4 inch thick metal plate, with 11" wide x 1 -1/4" high opening,
protected by inside hood and hinge flap, and with inside baffle to prevent removal of mail
from box.
7. Concealed Components and Mounting Frames: Aluminum or steel sheet.
8. Identification: Engrave face of unit with 1 inch high letters as follows: U.S. MAIL LETTER
BOX on 2 lines at top or bottom of unit.
9. Schedule Card Holder: Provide recessed or surface mounted holder for schedule card in
center of bottom front portion of unit. Fabricate of same material and finish as front of unit.
10. Mailbag Hooks: Provide 2 aluminum or stainless steel hooks at exterior front edge of bottom
AESI 27210 POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10550 -5
it 18JAN08
of surface mounted units, spaced 45" x 17 -1/2" apart, for supporting mailbags.
11. Material and Finish: Aluminum, clear anodic finish.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Preassemble postal specialties in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.
Form postal specialties to required shapes and sizes, with true lines and angles, square, rigid,
and without warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal
edges and comers free of sharp edges and burrs, and safe to touch.
B. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter comer joints. Form joints exposed to weather to
exclude water penetration.
C. Drill or punch holes required for fasteners and remove burrs. Use security fasteners where
fasteners are exposed. If used, seal external rivets before finishing.
D. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished
surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded joints of flux, and
dress exposed and contact surfaces.
E. Fabricate doors of postal specialties to preclude binding, warping or misalignment.
F. Fabricate rack ladders to support 5 mailbox modules and data distribution box units to form a
column of units.
G. Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic action by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
2.05 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM - Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Finish postal specialties after assembly.
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one -half of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in
the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed for compliance with
requirements of Contract Documents and to determine if conditions affecting performance of
work are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
AESI 27210 POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10550 -6
18JAN08
0 0
resolved. Commencement of installation shall constitute acceptance of conditions.
B. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, rough -in openings, clearances and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of work.
C. Examine walls for suitable conditions where recessed units will be installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install work meeting requirements of Contract Documents, as indicated by final
reviewed submittals for work and meeting instructions and recommendations of product
manufacturers. Consult with manufacturers for conditions not covered by printed instructions.
B. General: Install postal specialties level and plumb, according to manufacturers written
instructions and rough -in drawings.
1. Metal Protection: Where aluminum and copper alloys will contact grout, concrete, masonry,
wood or dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of
dissimilar metals.
2. Final acceptance on compliance with USPS requirements.
C. Horizontal Apartment Mailboxes: Install horizontal apartment mailboxes with center of tenant
door lock cylinder 67 inches maximum above finished floor and bottom of lowest compartment 28
inches minimum above finished floor.
1. Arrange compartments in groups, with not more than 2 wide and not less than 4 high
compartments operated by 1 master lock.
2. Install removable core door lock cylinders.
D. Collection Boxes: Install collection boxes with bottom of mail slots 48 inches maximum above
finished floor.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Arrange for USPS personnel to test receiving boxes and collection boxes after installation
according to USPS regulations.
B. Obtain written final approval from USPS postmaster that authorizes mail collection.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as postal specialties are
installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturers written installation instructions.
B. Adjust doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate
properly.
AESI 27210 POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10550 -7
18JAN08
v
C. On completion of postal specialty installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer.
D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace postal specialties that cannot be restored to factory finished
appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or fumished by postal specialty
manufacturer.
E. Replace postal specialties that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train Owners maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate and maintain postal specialties. See Section 01770 - Closeout Procedures.
END OF SECTION
P]
AESI 27210 POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10550 -8
18JAN08
TORCHIA ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 10810
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents: Provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of the Contract, Drawings and
Division 1 - General Requirements of the Specification, apply to this Section.
B. Description: Toilet accessories are indicated by Contract Documents and shall include work necessary
and incidental to completion and performance of the Work.
C. Included: Toilet accessories includes, but are not limited to, following:
1. Toilet tissue dispensers.
2. Hygiene units.
3. Soap dispensers.
4. Towel dispensers and waste receptacles.
5. Mirror units.
6. Grab bars.
7. Utility units.
8. Miscellaneous units.
C]
D. Schedule: Required types of toilet accessories include, but are not limited to, types specified and
scheduled in Part 2 of this Section.
E. Related Work:
1. Toilet compartments and related combination coat hook and bumper for each toilet compartment
and other related accessories.
2. Hole in counter, for mounting respective toilet accessory.
3. Blocking for future grab bars.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of following, except to extent of most stringent requirements
of Contract Documents and of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on performance of
the Work:
1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
2. ANSI Z97.1 - Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Materials Used in
Buildings.
3. ASTM F446 - Consumer Safety Specification for Grab Bars and Accessories in the Bathing Area.
4. CPSC 16CFR1201 - Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing Materials.
5. FGMA - Glazing Manual.
6. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, as applicable for warm air dryers.
7. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code (Codes for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures).
8. OSHA 29CFR1910 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards, including requirements relative to
toilet facilities, sanitary facilities and personnel protection associated with permanent work or
installation, and permanent places of employment.
9. USDOJ - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
TORCHIA TOILET ACCESSORIES
18JAN08
10810 -1
10. Handicapped people accessibility codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on
performance of the Work.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. General: Work shall meet performance requirements indicated by Contract Documents, including
requirements specified in this Paragraph and in other parts of this Section.
2. Handicapped Accessibility: Work shall meet most stringent requirements for design, providing
accessibility and usability for physically handicapped people, dimensions, performance, details,
operation, construction and installation required by codes and regulations of public authorities
bearing on performance of the Work, including but not limited to, Americans With Disabilities Act,
ANSI A117.1, OSHA 29CFR1910 and requirements of Section 01415 - Performance Requirements.
3. Grab Bars: Grab bars and blocking for grab bars and future grab bars shall meet requirements of
ASTM F446 and shall support forces as required by American with Disabilities Act, application of
250 pounds- force. Locations to be consistent with the latest version of ADAAG / ANSI A117.1 and
Fair Housing Guidelines.
4. Schedule: Provide toilet accessories at locations as indicated on Drawings.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Qualifications:
1. Provide toilet accessories of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units
exposed in same areas, except as otherwise acceptable to Architect.
2. Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of toilet accessories will not be permitted, except as
otherwise acceptable to Architect.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product specifications, technical data, standard detail drawings and installation
instructions of manufacturer for each product. Include published data, certified conformance report or
certified laboratory test report of manufacturer substantiating each proposed product meets
requirements of Contract Documents.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit setting drawings and templates for installation of anchorage devices which must
be embedded or attached to supporting structure.
C. Samples: Submit full size samples of each type toilet accessory unit to Architect for review of design
and operation. Samples will be returned and only acceptable samples may be used in the Work.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Built -In Items: Promptly deliver accessories to be built -in supporting structure. Include final reviewed
setting drawings, diagrams, template and instructions for installation of built -in items.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
TORCHIA TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810 -2
18JAN08
• •
A. Coordination: Coordinate toilet accessory locations, installation and sequencing with other work to avoid
interference with and ensure proper installation, operation, performance, adjustment, cleaning and
servicing of toilet accessories.
1.07 MAINTENANCE
A. Instructions: Furnish maintenance and operating instructions of manufacturer for toilet accessories.
Include instructions for operation, adjustments and maintenance, and service recommendations and
replaceable parts list.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. General: Warrantywork meeting provisions of Conditions of the Contract, except warranty shall include
additional requirements specked in this Article.
B. Mirrors: Warranty against silver spoilage; extending time period to 15 years.
C. Diaper Changing Station: Extend warranty time period to 5 years.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240, Type 304, 0.029 inch minimum thickness (22 gage), with AISI
Number 4 (satin) finish, except as otherwise required.
B. Stainless Steel Tube: ASTM A269, seamless, Type 304, 0.049 inch minimum wall thickness, AISI
Number 4 (satin) finish, except as otherwise required.
C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A366, cold rolled, commercial quality, 20 gage minimum base metal, except as
otherwise required. Surface preparation and pretreatment as required for applied finish.
D. Zinc Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653, commercial quality, Coating Designation G60 minimum, 20 gage
minimum base metal, except as otherwise required. Surface preparation and pretreatment as required
for applied finish.
E. Brass: ASTM B19 for leaded and unleaded flat products; ASTM 616 for rods, shapes, forgings and flat
products with finished edges, and ASTM B30 for castings.
F. Mirror Glass - Laminated Safety: Laminated glass unit consisting of two plies of 1/8 inch minimum
thickness glass with 0.030 inch plastic interlayer as adhesive, safety glass, meeting requirements of
ASTM C1172, Kind LM; ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR1201, Category II materials. Mirror glass shall
meet requirements of ASTM C1036, Type I (transparent, flat), Class 1 (clear), Qualityg2 (mirrorquality)
minimum, with silver coating, electrolytically plated copper protective coating by galvanic process, and
non - metallic protective coating meeting requirements of FS DD -M -411.
1. Edges: Edges of mirror glass units shall be square with glass face. Grind edges as required for
performance and uniform appearance.
2. Edge Seal: Seal edges of back surface coatings to prevent deterioration and damage of coatings.
TORCHIA TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810 -3
18JAN08
0
G. Zinc Coated Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A153, hot -dip zinc coated after fabrication.
H. Fasteners: Screws, bolts and other devices of same material as toilet accessory unit, or of zinc coated
steel where concealed.
Inserts and Anchorages:
1. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must beset in or embedded in supporting construction
for installation of toilet accessories. Provide setting drawings, templates and instructions for
installation of anchorage devices.
2. See specification sections for work in which inserts and anchoring devices are to be set or
embedded for installation of such devices.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Except where otherwise required by Contract Documents, fabricate toilet accessory units:
a. Of all welded construction.
b. With exposed sheet metal components of one piece seamless construction.
c. Without mitered corners.
d. With tight seams and joints when applicable.
e. With exposed and semi - exposed edges uniformly hemmed, rolled or eased to provide safe
edges and neat appearance.
2. Grain of stainless steel finish of toilet accessory units shall be orientated in length or long dimension
of unit.
3. No names or labels are permitted on exposed faces of toilet accessory units. On interior surface not
exposed to view or on back surface, provide identification of each accessory item either by a printed,
waterproof label or a stamped nameplate indicating name of manufacturer and product model
number.
B. Mounting Features:
1. Recessed Units: Recessed toilet accessories shall have a 1 inch wide flange on all sides of unit
which is flush with front face of unit and overlaps adjacent construction. Flange shall be one piece
seamless construction by drawing or by mitered comers, welded and finished to match adjacent
metal surfaces.
2. Semi - Recessed Units: Semi - recessed toilet accessories shall have a skirt on all sides of unit of
depth appropriate for semi - recessed condition and which overlaps adjacent construction.
C. Doors: Hang doors or access panels with continuous, full length stainless steel piano hinges.
D. Anchorages: Provide concealed anchorages and fasteners when toilet accessory unit is closed,
otherwise provide tamperproof anchorages and fasteners.
E. Keys: Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal access for servicing.
Provide 6 keys minimum for Owner.
TORCHIA TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810 -4
18JAN08
0 •
2.03 GRAB BARS (GB)
A. Grab Bar GB 1 - Concealed Mounting:
1. Description: Stainless steel grab bar meeting requirements of ASTM F446 and which provide 1 -1/2
inch clearance between wall and bar. Configuration of grab bar shall be as indicated on Drawings.
a. Mounting: Concealed anchorages for type of installation with snap flange cover.
b. Non -Slip Gripping Surfaces: Peened, knurled or striated safety grip finish.
c. Size: 1 -1/2 inches outside diameter with wall thickness of 0.049 inch (18 gage) minimum.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. American Specialties, Inc., 3800 -P Series.
b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., B- 6806.99 Series.
c. Bradley Corporation, 812 -2 Series.
d. McKinney Parker Washroom Accessories Corp., 9604 Series.
2.04 UTILITY UNITS (UU)
A. Utility Unit UU -1 -Shelf:
1. Description: Shelf unit of width and length indicated on Drawings. Shelf shall be 0.050 inch thick
(18 gage) minimum stainless steel with 3/4 inch returned edges. Provide mounting brackets 0.062
inch thick (16 gage) minimum stainless steel welded to shelf bottom. Brackets shall be located as
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. American Specialties, Inc., 0692 -5 Series, 5 inches wide; 0692 -6 Series, 6 inches wide, and
0692 -8, 8 inches wide.
b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. B -295 Series, 5 inches wide; B -296 Series, 6 inches wide,
and B -298 Series, 8 inches wide.
c. Bradley Corporation, 755 Series, 5 inches wide; 756 Series, 6 inches wide, and 758 Series, 8
inches wide.
d. McKinney Parker Washroom Accessories Corp., 224 -5 Series, 5 inches wide; 224 -6 Series, 6
inches wide and 224 -8 Series, 8 inches wide.
B. Utility Unit UU -2 - Mop and Broom Holder:
1. Description: Mop and broom holder, 36 inches long, complete with four mop and broom holders.
Holder shall be 0.05 inch thick (18 gage) stainless steel, hat channel configuration, with spring
loaded, rubber, cam type mop and broom holders.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. American Specialties, Inc., 8215 -B.
b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., B- 223x36.
c. Bradley Corporation, 995.
d. McKinney Parker Washroom Accessories Corp., 233.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
TORCHIA TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810 -5
18JAN08
AWN
3.01 EXAMINATION 'i
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be installed for compliance with
requirements of Contract Documents and to determine if conditions affecting performance of work are
satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved.
Commencement of installation shall constitute acceptance of conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install work meeting requirements of Contract Documents, as indicated by final reviewed
submittals for work and meeting instructions and recommendations of product manufacturers. Consult
with manufacturers for conditions not covered by printed instructions.
B. Trueness: Install toilet accessories in locations and at heights required, plumb, level and square.
C. Anchorage: Provide anchors, bolts and other necessary anchorages, and fastenings appropriate to
supporting structure as recommended by unit manufacturer and attach accessories securely to
supporting structure.
1. Use concealed fastenings wherever possible.
2. Install concealed mounting devices and fasteners fabricated of same material as accessories, orof
galvanized steel, as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Install exposed mounting devices and fasteners finished to match accessories.
4. Provide theft resistant fasteners for accessory mountings.
D. Mirrors: Secure mirrors to walls in concealed tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts or
screws.
E. Grab Bars: Install grab bars to withstand design criteria loading specified in this Section and meeting
requirements of ASTM F446.
F. Blocking for Grab Bars and future Grab Bars: Provide 16 ga. Minimum galvanized steel sheet at all tub,
shower and toilet locations. Install per latest geometries shown in ADAAG / ANSI A117.1.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjustments: Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function
smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Cleaning: Remove temporary labels and protective coating, and then clean and polish exposed
surfaces meeting instructions of manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
TORCHIA TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810 -6
18JAN08
11
0
TORCHIA ASSOCIATES, INC.
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
•
SECTION 11451
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
A. Related Documents: Provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of the Contract, Drawings
and Division 1 - General Requirements of the Specification, apply to the work of this Section.
B. Description: Residential appliances are indicated on Contract Documents, and shall include work
necessary and incidental to proper completion and performance of the Work.
C. Included: Residential appliances include, but are not limited to, following:
1. Cooking equipment including ranges and microwave ovens.
2. Microwave and oven combination.
3. Refrigerator and freezers.
4. Icemaker hookup.
5. Dishwashers.
6. Residential Laundry equipment
I,- ,
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of following, except to extent of most stringent
requirements of Contract Documents, and of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing
on performance of the Work:
1. NAECA: Provide residential appliances that comply with NAECA standards.
2. NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by
a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
3. UL and NEMA: Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances that
are UL Listed and Labeled and that comply with applicable NEMA standards.
B. Performance Requirements:
General: Work shall meet performance requirements indicated by Contract Documents,
including requirements specified in this Paragraph and in other parts of this Section.
2. Handicapped Accessibility: Work shall meet most stringent requirements for design, providing
accessibility and usability for physically handicapped people, dimensions, performance,
details, operation, construction and installation required by codes and regulations of public
authorities bearing on performance of the Work, including but not limited to, Americans With
Disabilities Act, ANSI A117.1, OSHA 29CFR1910 and requirements of Section 01415 -
Performance Requirements.
fo TORCHIA RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
18JAN08
11451 -1
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer for
installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain residential appliances through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy -cost analysis
(estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the FTC Appliance
Labeling Rule.
1. Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. General: Warranty work meeting provisions of Conditions of the Contract, except warranty shall
include additional requirements specked in this Article.
B. Time Period: Extend warranty time period as follows:
1. Electric Range: Five year warranty for in -home service on surface burner elements.
2. Microwave Oven: Five year warranty for in -home service on defects in magnetron tube.
3. Refrigerator /Freezer: Five year warranty for in -home service on sealed refrigeration system.
4. Dishwasher: Five year warranty for in -home service against deterioration of tub and door
liner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ,
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Bosch.
B.
KitchenAid, U.S.A.
C.
Wolf /SubZero.
D.
GE.
E.
Maytag.
2.02 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Stainless Steel Finish: Provide appliances with manufacturer standard finish complying with
manufacturer written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application,
baking, color, gloss, and minimum dry film thickness for painted finishes, ground and polished
stainless steel surfaces for uniform, directionally textured finish.
TORCHIA RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 -2
18JAN08
0
PART 3 - EXECUTION
6
3.01 EXAMINATION
E
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be installed for compliance with
requirements of Contract Documents and to determine if conditions affecting performance of work
are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
resolved. Commencement of installation shall constitute acceptance of conditions.
B. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
C. Examine rough -in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before
equipment installation.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install work meeting requirements of Contract Documents, as indicated by final reviewed
submittals for work and meeting instructions and recommendations of product manufacturers.
Consult with manufacturers for conditions not covered by printed instructions.
B. General: Comply with manufacturer written instructions.
C. Built -in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed
fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are
completely concealed.
D. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each
area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.
E. Utilities: Refer to Division 15 - Mechanical and Division 16 - Electrical for plumbing and electrical
requirements.
3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Test each item of residential appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments.
B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed.
C. Remove packing material from residential appliances and leave units in dean condition, ready for
operation.
3.04 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCE SCHEDULE
A. All appliances:
1. As shown on architectural plans.
END OF SECTION
0 TORCHIA RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 -3
18JAN08
0
`J
PI
NE
s i
TORCHIA ASSOCIATES, INC. SECTION 12370
MASTER SPECIFICATION RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents: Provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of the Contract, Drawings and
Division 1 - General Requirements of the Specification, apply to this Section.
B. Description: Residential casework is indicated by Contract Documents and shall include work necessary
and incidental to completion and performance of the work.
C. Included: Residential casework includes, but is not limited to, following:
1. Wood faced residential cabinets and countertops.
2. Plastic laminate faced cabinets and countertops.
D. Related Work:
1. Appliances mounted in casework.
2. Sink units and associated trim mounted in countertops.
3. Electrical units mounted in casework.
n
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces visible when drawers and opaque doors are closed; behind clear glass
doors; bottoms of casework 43 inches or more above finished floor.
B. Semi - Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces which become visible when opaque doors are open or drawers are
extended; bottoms of casework are more than 30 inches and less than 42 inches above finished floor.
C. Concealed Surfaces: Surfaces considered concealed when surfaces not visible after installation;
bottoms of casework less than 30 inches above finished floor; tops of casework over 78 inches above
finished floor and not visible from an upper level; stretchers, blocking, and components concealed by
drawers.
D. Reveal Overlay: Door and drawer faces partially cover cabinet frame.
E. Flush Overlay: Door and drawer faces cover cabinet frame with space between faces sufficient for
operating clearance.
F. Flush: Door and drawer faces flush with cabinet face.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of following, except to extent of most stringent requirements
of Contract Documents and of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on performance of
the work:
TORCHIA RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
18JAN08
12370 -1
�J
1. ANSUKCMA A161.1 - Recommended Performance and Construction Standards for Kitchen and
Vanity Cabinets.
2. ANSUKCMA A161.11.
3. KCMA - Directory of Certified Cabinet Manufacturers.
4. USDOJ - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
5. Handicapped people accessibility codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on
performance of the work.
B. Design Basis:
General: Descriptions and requirements indicated by Contract Documents establish basic
arrangements, visual concepts, dimensions and modules of units, profiles and sightliness of
members, performance, function, operation and like requirements. Within these limitations, work
shall meet arrangements, visual concepts, design criteria and like requirements indicated by
Contract Documents, and include components not indicated but necessary for performance,
function, operation and to be a complete (, permanent and safe operating) system (unit). Perform
modifications only as necessary to meet requirements of Contract Documents and to coordinate the
work, subject to acceptance by Architect. Maintain design concept without altering profiles and
alignments. Variations in details and materials shall not adversely affect appearance, durability,
strength and performance. Provide complete drawings and data of proposed modifications.
2. Qualification: Contract Documents are intended to cover complete work and to outline products
required, but not to cover details of design and construction. Such details shall be responsibility of
manufacturer (installer). Contract Documents do not inventor develop any part of (work) (system),
but have made only selections (of capacities, speeds, control systems, materials and other like
characteristics) from choices made available by manufacturer.
C. Design Criteria:
1. General: Work shall meet and perform to design criteria and like requirements indicated by Contract
Documents, (including requirements specified in this Paragraph and in other parts of this Section)
(with normal maintenance as defined by maintenance manual of manufacturer).
D. Handicapped Accessibility: Meet requirements of Section 01415 -Performance Criteria.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Qualifications:
General: Provide products indicated under same category produced by a single manufacturer for
the work.
2. Standards: Meet requirements of ANSUKCMA A161.1 and HUD - Minimum Property Standards.
3. KCMA Certification: Provide kitchen casework with KCMA - Certified Cabinet seal affixed in a
semiexposed location of each unit, showing compliance with ANSUKCMA A161.1.
B. Installer Qualifications:
1. General: Installer shall have 10 years minimum documented experience in design, engineering,
detailing, fabrication, installation and maintenance of type and quality required for work and shall be
TORCHIA RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12370 -2
18JAN08
P]
ri
•
acceptable to manufacturer. Installer shall maintain and have maintained a service center with parts
inventory and manufacturer trained personnel for 5 years minimum. Upon request, provide proof of
qualifications.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product specifications, technical data (standard detail drawings) and installation
instructions of manufacturer for each product (, product system and work) component and finish of work
(proprietary materials, equipment and products). Include published data, certified conformance report
or certified laboratory test report of manufacturer substantiating each proposed product (system) meets
requirements of Contract Documents (and has been tested with adjacent products identical to products
to be used in work) (and is intended for application).
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of work. Indicate plans and wall
elevations at 1/4 inch scale, typical unit elevations at 3/4 inch scale and detail sections at full scale.
Identify each unit using same identification reference indicated on Drawings. Indicate details and
requirements for following and other pertinent data not included in submitted product data of
manufacturer:
1. Layout arrangement and dimensions of work. Indicate arrangement and, where necessary, details
of adjacent construction relative to work, correctly detailed and dimensioned.
2. Specifications for materials and components.
3. Casework: Indicate location and size, accessories, materials, finishes, and filler panels. Include fully
dimensioned plans, elevations, and anchorage details to countertop and walls.
4. Countertops: Indicate sizes, shapes, edge and backsplash profiles, cutouts for plumbing fixtures,
and methods of joining.
C. Samples - Initial Selection: Submit color charts of manufacturer in form of unit sections showing full
range of colors, textures and patterns available for each type of material exposed to view.
D. Samples - Verification: Submit full size units of each type of material required; insets for each color,
texture and pattern required, showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics.
1. 12 inch square samples of wood with a transparent finish for each species.
2. 12 inch square samples of veneered plywood with a transparent finish.
3. 12 inch square samples of plastic laminate for countertops.
4. 12 inch square samples of plastic laminate for casework finish.
5. 6 inch square samples of solid surface for countertops.
6. One unit of each type of exposed hardware.
E. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer certifying that materials furnished complywith specified
requirements.
1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Deliver casework as factory assembled units, packaged individually.
TORCHIA RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
18JAN08
12370 -3
r
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Meet requirements, instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for
temperature and humidity conditions during storage and installation. Do not install casework until these
conditions have been attained and stabilized.
B. Field Measurements: Verify shade dimensions by field measurements before preparation of shop
drawings and fabrication, where possible to ensure proper fitting of work. Verify shades can be installed
in compliance with design. Show field measurements on shop drawings. Allow for adjustments
wherever verifying field measurements before fabrication.
PRODUCTS
1.08 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Imperial Cabinet Co., Inc.
B.
Merillat Ind., Inc.
C.
Triangle Pacific Corp.
D.
Yorktowne Cabinets.
E.
Elegant Cabinetry.
1.09
MATERIALS
A. General: Sizes, dimensions, and thicknesses given are minimum dimensions.
B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, mat - formed particleboard, Grade 1 -M -2 with density of 40 pcf minimum,
internal bond of 60 psi minimum, and screw holding capacity of 225 pounds minimum on faces and 200
pounds minimum on edges.
C. Hardwood Plywood: ANSUHPMA HP hardwood and decorative plywood, Good Grade (1) or better.
D. Particleboard Core Plywood: ANSUHPMA HP hardwood and decorative plywood, Good Grade (1) or
better.
E. Solid Wood: Clear, dry, sound, and free of defects selected from First Grade lumber as defined by
NHLA.
F. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, Class 1, tempered.
G. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3.
1. Provide colorthrough plastic laminate.
H. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Comply with ALA -1988 and NEMA LD 3 for GP 20; melamine or
polyester.
TORCHIA RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12370 -4
18JAN08
0
1.10 WOOD FACE CASEWORK
A. Solid Wood and Face Veneer Species: Natural character alder.
B. Face Style: Flush overlay.
C. Face Frame: Frameless.
D. Flush Door and Drawer Fronts: 1/2 inch thick, 5 -ply, hardwood plywood with hardwood face veneers
and crossbanding.
E. Door and Drawer Fronts: Solid wood stiles and rails, 3/4 inch thick for doors and 3/4 inch thick for
drawer fronts, with 1/4 inch thick plywood for center panels.
F. Back, Top, and Bottom Rails: Solid wood, 3/4" X 3 ", interlocking with end panels and rabbeted to
receive top and bottom panels. Back rails secured under pressure with glue and with mechanical
fasteners.
G. Exposed Cabinet Ends: Particleboard, 1/2 inch thick, with face veneer to match door and drawer fronts
and thermoset decorative panels on interior surfaces. Connect to stile with pressure -glued
tongue- and -plow joint and concealed mechanical fasteners.
H. Concealed Cabinet Ends: Particleboard, 1/2 inch thick, with thermoset decorative panels on interior
surfaces. Connect to stile with pressure -glued tongue- and -plow joint and concealed mechanical
fasteners.
I. Cabinet Tops and Bottoms: Particleboard, 1/2 inch thick, or hardwood plywood, 3/8 inch thick, fully
supported by and secured in rabbets in end panels, front frame and back rail.
J. Wall -Hung Unit Back Panels: Hardboard, 1/8 inch thick, or hardwood plywood, 3/16 inch thick, fastened
to rear edge of ends and to top and bottom rails.
K. Base Unit Back Panels: Hardboard, 1/8 inch thick, with thermoset decorative panels on interior surfaces
fastened to rear edge of end panels and to top and bottom rails.
L. Front Frame Drawer Rails: Solid wood, 1" x 1 -1/4 ", mortised and fastened into face frame.
M. Toe Boards: Particleboard, 5/8 inch thick, attached between end panels and extended from bottom
panel to floor.
N. Corner Blocks: Solid wood, glued and fastened in each top corner to maintain casework squareness
and rigidity.
O. Corner Posts: Solid wood, 3/4" x 7/8 ", attached to vertical corners; fabricated with notches to provide
adjustability and retainment of interior storage devices.
P. Drawers: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body.
Fabricate with subfront and back rabbeted into sides and secured with glue and mechanical fasteners
as follows:
1. Drawer Suspension: Provide for a minimum capacity of 50 pounds, with twin- track, side - mounted,
drawer -glide suspension with nylon rollers. Provide self - closing feature and positive stop.
Q. Shelves: Particleboard core plywood, 5/8 inch thick or particleboard, 1/2 inch thick, with thermoset
decorative panels on top, bottom, and exposed (front) edge.
TORCHIA RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12370 -5
18JAN08
R. Finishes:
1. Factory Finishing: Finish casework at factory. Defer only final touch -up until after installation.
2. Finish: Match sample of Architect.
1.11 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACE CASEWORK
A. Face Style: Flush overlay.
B. Face Frame: Frameless.
C. Concealed Surfaces: Sound and dry solid wood, plywood, or particleboard without defects affecting
strength, utility, or stability.
D. Sides, Dividers, Tops, Bottoms, Shelves, and Stretchers: Plastic laminate GP 28 on 1/2 inch thick
particleboard. Provide stretchers for top of base cabinet.
E. Back Panels: Hardboard, 1/8 inch thick, with thermoset decorative panels on interior surfaces fastened
to rear edge of end panels and to top and bottom rails.
F. Exposed Edge Treatment: Edge doors and drawer fronts with plastic laminate of same material as
exposed faces.
G. Semi - Exposed Edge Treatment: Edge top of drawer body with high- impact plastic tee edging. Edge
remaining casework surfaces with plastic laminate GP 28 matching adjoining plastic laminate in color,
pattern, and finish.
H. Doors, Drawer Fronts, Fixed Panels, Toeboards, and Ends: Plastic laminate GP 28 on 5/8 inch thick
particleboard.
I. Drawers: Fabricate with front, bottom, and back rabbeted in sides and secured with glue and
mechanical fasteners as follows:
1. Subfronts, Sides, and Backs: Particleboard, 3/8 inch thick.
2. Bottoms: Particleboard, 1/4 inch thick minimum.
3. Drawer Suspension: Provide for a minimum capacity of 50 pounds, with twin- track, side - mounted,
drawer -glide suspension with nylon rollers. Provide self - closing feature and positive stop.
J. Joinery: Rabbet backs flush into end panels and secure with concealed mechanical fasteners.
Connect tops and bottoms of wall cabinets and bottoms and stretchers of base cabinets to ends and
dividers with mechanical fasteners. Rabbet tops, bottoms, and backs into end panels.
K. Subbase: Particleboard, 3/4 inch thick.
L. Toe Board: Particleboard, 5/8 inch thick, attached to subbase with concealed fasteners.
1.12 CASEWORK HARDWARE
A. General: Meet requirements of ANSI A156.9, see schedule for further information.
TORCHIA RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12370 -6
18JAN08
1.13 COUNTERTOPS- PLASTIC LAMINATE
A. General:
1. Standard: Meet requirements of ANSI A161.2.
B. Plastic Laminate Substrate - No Sink:
1. Standard: ASTM D1037.
•
2. Medium- Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, 3/4 inch thick minimum.
C. Plastic Laminate Substrate - With Sink: Exterior grade plywood or phenolic resin particleboard meet
requirements of ASTM D1037.
D. Backer Sheet: BK 20 backer sheet wherever unsupported countertop area exceeds 4 square feet and
substrate is 3/4 inch thick; 6 square feet and substrate is 1 inch thick; 8 square feet and substrate is
1-1/8 inch or thicker.
E. Countertop, Backsplash, and Endsplash Plastic Laminate: GP 50.
F. Configuration: Provide countertops with following front style, cove and backsplash style:
1. Front Style: No drip.
2. Cove: Applied.
0 ' 3. Backsplash and Endsplash Style: Square edge with scribe.
EXECUTION
1.14 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be installed for compliance with
requirements of Contract Documents and to determine if conditions affecting performance of work are
satisfactory. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved.
1.15 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install work meeting requirements of Contract Documents, including requirements specified in
Part 2 of this Section, as indicated by final reviewed submittals for work, and meeting instructions and
recommendations of product manufacturers. Consult with manufacturers for conditions not covered by
printed instructions.
B. Surfaces: Install casework with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces using concealed shims.
Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe
strips and moldings in finish to match casework face.
C. Doors and Drawers: Install casework without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and
are aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered
operation.
D. Tolerance: Install casework and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
TORCHIA RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12370 -7
18JAN08
E. Anchorage: Fasten unit of casework to adjacent unit and to structural support members of wall
construction with Number 10 minimum wood screws with washer head or washer.
F. Plastic Laminate Countertops: Fasten by screwing through corner blocks in base units into underside of
countertop. Spline and glue joints in countertops and provide concealed mechanical clamping of joint.
G. Solid Surface Countertops: Fasten by screwing through corner blocks in base units into underside of
countertop. Align adjacent surfaces. Form seams 1/8 inch wide and adhere with manufacturer's
recommended joint adhesive in color to match countertop.
1.16 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjustment: Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and lubricate to provide
unencumbered operation.
B. Cleaning: Clean casework on exposed and semi - exposed surfaces. Touch up factory- applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION
Ic
TORCHIA RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12370 -8
18JAN08
0
A. EPSTEIN AND SONS INTERNATIONAL, INC.
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
•
SECTION 13115
ELECTRONIC CLOCK SYSTEMS
A. Related Documents: Provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of the Contract, Drawings and
Division 1 - General Requirements of the Specification, apply to this Section.
B. Description: Electronic clock systems are indicated by Contract Documents and shall include work
necessary and incidental to completion and performance of the Work.
C. Included: Electronic Clock systems include, but are not limited to, following:
1. Design, engineering, detailing, fabrication and installation of electronic clock systems.
2. Modular electronic clocks consisting of:
a. Exterior Wall interface.
b. Face and trim construction.
c. Operating elements.
d. Controller.
3. Furnishing inserts and anchors to be built -in supporting construction for installation of electronic
clock systems.
C]
D. Related Work:
1. Receiving and installing inserts and anchors to be built -in supporting construction for installation of
electronic clock systems.
2. Electrical power wiring and connections to electronic clock systems.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of following, except to extent of most stringent requirements
of Contract Documents and of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on performance of
the Work:
1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
2. FMRC - Approval Guide, as applicable to work.
3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
4. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code (Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures).
5. OSHA 29CFR1910 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards, for requirements relative to
personnel protection associated with permanent work, installation and operations.
6. UL - Standards, as applicable to work.
7. USDOJ - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
8. Handicapped people accessibility codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on
performance of the Work.
ID AESI 27210 ELECTRONIC CLOCK SYSTEMS
18JAN08
13115 -1
0 a
B. Performance Basis:
General: Descriptions and requirements indicated by Contract Documents establish basic concepts,
dimensions and modules of units, profiles and sightlines of members, performance, function,
operation and like requirements. Within these limitations, work shall meet concepts and
performance requirements indicated by Contract Documents, and include components not indicated
but necessary for performance, function, operation and to be complete units. Perform modifications
only as necessary to meet requirements of Contract Documents and to coordinate work, subjectto
acceptance by Architect. Maintain visual concepts without altering profiles and alignments. Provide
complete drawings and data of proposed modifications.
2. Certification: Work shall be designed, certified, reviewed and inspected by engineer of Contractor
subject to minimum requirements of Contract Documents.
C. Performance Requirements:
1. General: Work shall meet performance requirements indicated by Contract Documents with normal
maintenance as defined by printed product and maintenance data, and maintenance data of
manufacturer.
2. Performance Conditions: Design of work shall include live loads, wind loads, creep, shrinkage,
deflections, temperature variations, stresses, expansion and contraction requirements, seismic
forces, vibration and other like conditions meeting most stringent requirements of Contract
Documents and of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work.
3. Wind Loads, Live Loads, Movements and Thermal Resistivity: Meet requirements of Section 01415
- Performance Requirements.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Responsibility: Work shall be performed by a single manufacturer having undivided responsibility
for providing complete work and for performance, quality and appearance of work.
B. Product Qualifications: Provide products indicated under same category as complete units produced by
a single manufacturer for the work. Use only one type and manufacture run of each product.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: One of acceptable manufacturers specified in Part 2 of this Section.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product specifications, technical data, standard detail drawings, dimension
diagrams, anchor details and installation instructions for each unit, and products to be used in work.
Include published data, certified conformance report or certified laboratory test report of manufacturer
substantiating each proposed product meets requirements of Contract Documents.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of work. Include plans,
elevations, and details of sections and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
C. Samples: Submit representative samples of each different material and finished product. Sampleswill
be reviewed only for visual characteristics.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble work in shop to greatest extent possible, so as to minimize splicing and
assembly of work at project site. Disassemble work only to extent necessary for shipping and handling.
Mark work for reassembly and coordinated installation.
AESI 27210 ELECTRONIC CLOCK SYSTEMS 13115 -2
18JAN08
E
•
1.06 MAINTENANCE
40 A. Data: Provide maintenance data of manufacturer for work. Include instructions for adjustments and
maintenance, and maintenance recommendations. Include instructions for general maintenance,
including cleaning and repair, and product data of manufacturer for each product. Also, include
recommended cleaning agents.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. General: Warranty work meeting provisions of Conditions of the Contract, except warranty shall include
additional requirements specified in this Article.
B. Coverage:
1. General: Defective materials and workmanship shall include, but not be limited to, abnormal
deterioration, aging or weathering of work; air infiltration and water leakage exceeding specked
limits; excessive deflections and failure of components resulting from exposure to pressures, loads
and forces up to specified limits; failure of operating parts to function normally; deterioration or
defacement of finishes in excess of normal weathering and aging and exceeding specified limits,
and failure of work to meet performance requirements indicated by Contract Documents.
2. Extent: Warranty shall not include damage caused by vandalism or conditions exceeding
performance requirements indicated by Contract Documents. However, warranty shall include
failures or defects for which causes cannot be determined.
3. Corrections: Warranty shall include corrections of work found to be defective or not meeting
requirements of Contract Documents at no addition to Contract Sum. Included, shall be:
a. Removal, replacement and correction of damages resulting from such defects or
nonconformance with Contract Documents, and of other materials and work to extent required to
repair or replace work, exclusive of repairs required as a result of improper maintenance or
operation, or of normal wear.
b. Corrective work shall be performed by original installer.
4. Limitations: Include specific statements of any limitations, required maintenance and similar
conditions of warranty.
C. Costs: Warranty shall be without cost limitation and at no cost to Owner.
D. Signatures: Warranty shall be signed by Contractor, installer and manufacturer.
E. Time Period: Extend warranty time period to 2 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Metal:
1. Campbellsville Industries, Inc.
2. Electric Time Company, Inc..
3. Lumichron, Inc.
AESI 27210 ELECTRONIC CLOCK SYSTEMS 13115 -3
18JAN08
D 0
2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. General: Provide materials, components and fabrications as indicated on Drawings and in this Section.
B. Surfaces: For fabrication of electronic clock systems which will be exposed to view, use only materials
which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, marks, trade names and roughness.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate work meeting requirements of Contract Documents, as indicated byfinal reviewed
submittals for work, and meeting instructions and recommendations of product manufacturers.
B. Size and Thickness: Select size and thickness of products to provide necessary strength and durability
in finished work for intended application, except use products of sizes and thicknesses not less than
required as minimum requirement.
C. Exposed Work:
1. General: Exposed work shall be carefully matched to produce continuity of line and design, and
accurate relation of planes and angles. Work to dimensions indicated, using proven fabrication
details.
2. Surfaces: Select products for flatness, smoothness and freedom from surface blemishes, including
pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discoloration and other like conditions. Imperfections are
not acceptable.
3. Joinery: Joints in work shall be accurately fitted, square and in alignment, rigidly secured with
hairline contacts, and sealed weathertight. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a
manner to exclude penetration or infiltration of water. Form sections to provide flush meeting edges
without laps at joists and exposed edges. Fit components to be free of vibration and rattle. Cope or
miter corners and other intersections as applicable. Joinery methods shall not effect finish or be
unsightly.
4. Comers: Form metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation,
discoloration and otherwise impairing work.
5. Edges: Remove arises from cut edges, and ease edges and corners to a radius of approximate
1/64 inch.
6. Flatness and Rigidity: Surfaces shall be uniform and free of oil canning, undulations and other
undesirable visual effects as required to meet flatness design criteria requirements of this Section.
Provide stiffeners welded or bonded to concealed surfaces or laminated backing as required to
assure optimum flatness and rigidity.
D. Plastic Components: No plastic, polymer resin or like material or component shall be employed in
framing system as only means of providing structural integrity, including securing, anchoring or
connecting glazing stops and panels to framing members, metal components and like conditions.
Reinforcement shall be concealed in completed work.
E. Reinforcement: Reinforce work as required to meet performance requirements and for anchoring work
to supporting construction. Reinforcement shall be concealed in completed work.
F. Assembly:
1. General: Fabricate components into complete units true to line with accurate angles and straight
edges. Methods of assembly and joining shall be proven methods optional with manufacturer.
Workmanship and finished items shall be acceptable to Architect.
AESI 27210 ELECTRONIC CLOCK SYSTEMS 13115 -4
18JAN08
•
2. Clearances: Fabricate work allowing for minimum clearances and shim spacing of components
within limits of performance requirements, yet enabling assembly and installation.
3. Fasteners:
a. General: Do not use exposed fasteners, except where unavoidable for assembly of units and
unavoidable for application. No fastener shall impair independent movement of components.
b. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw anchor into supporting work, reinforce interior to receive
screw threads.
4. Distortion and Overstress: Fabricate and fasten work so work will not be distorted nor fasteners
overstressed from expansion, contraction and other movements of the work.
2.04 FINISHES
A. General:
1. Finish: Meet requirements and recommendations of NAAMM - Metal Finishes Manual relative to
finishes required. Factory finish metal components providing required type finish. Finish surfaces
exposed in the completed work shall match final reviewed samples. Coordinate finishes of
components to assure uniform quality and finish, including color, textures and sheen.
2. System Qualifications: Application of each finish system shall be qualified by finish manufacturer.
Provide certification that applicator is acceptable to finish manufacturer and that process, including
surface preparation and pretreatment, and coating applications and curing, is in accordance with
specifications of finish manufacturer.
3. Repair: Repair or touch -up of finished surfaces shall be as specified in Article - Adjusting and
Cleaning, of this Section.
B. Required Finishes: Provide components with respective type finish as follows and meeting
requirements for type finish as specified in this Article:
1. Exposed Aluminum - PVDF finish, solid color to match existing Condominium Tower North Window
system; Kynar painted bronze finish, color number K70634.
C. PVDF Finish: Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) finish shall be high performance, heavy duty, resin finish
system. Finish coats shall contain 70 percent minimum by weight of PVDF resin, Arkema Inc., Kynar
500, or Solvay Solexis, Inc., Hylar 5000.
1. Performance: Finish system shall meet requirements of AAMA 2605.2, and for 20 years minimum
period service life shall not chalk more than ASTM D4214, Method A, Number 8 Rating, not change
color more than 5 A E Hunter units when evaluated meeting requirements of ASTM D2244, and not
check, craze or peel. In addition, finish system shall meet performance criteria and data indicated in
current system specifications of specified finish manufacturer.
2. Applications:
a. Coil: Use coil application finish system for sheet metal substrates.
b. Spray: Use spray application finish system for extruded substrates.
3. Colors: Conventional solid color, except bright and metallic colors, of finish manufacturer as
selected by Architect.
4. Texture: Smooth finish.
ID AESI 27210 ELECTRONIC CLOCK SYSTEMS 13115 -5
18JAN08
D. Anodic Finishes:
1. Clear: AA- M10C22A41, unspecified mill finish, medium matte, clear (natural) aluminum color,
Architectural Class 1 (0.7 mils) meeting requirements of AAMA 611.
2. Testing: Quality Assurance Service will test for meeting requirements of ISO 3210.
2.05 TOWER CLOCK SYSTEMS
A. Basis of Design: Campbellsville Clock Company, canister clocks, white illuminated face with bronze
kynar letters and hands. Dial #R -7 with Hands #M -09. Remote clock setting controls and pilot clock
mounted in Destinations Resorts Management Office room # M107 or as directed by Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be installed for compliance with
requirements of Contract Documents and to determine if conditions affecting performance of work are
satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved.
Commencement of installation shall constitute acceptance of conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Anchor Bolt Alignment: Check alignment of anchor bolts before installing and cleanout associated
sleeves. Do not cut bolts because of misalignment. Notify Architect of errors and obtain acceptance of
Architect before proceeding with corrections.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install work meeting requirements of Contract Documents, as indicated by final reviewed
submittals for work, and meeting instructions and recommendations of product manufacturers. Consult
with manufacturer for conditions not covered by printed instructions.
B. Anchorage:
1. Anchor components to supporting construction, securely in place using permanent mechanical
attachment system which meets performance requirements, permit movementswhich are intended
and necessary, and permits adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and irregularities.
Use non - staining and non - corrosive shims, anchors, fasteners, spacers and fillers. Lead, plastic
and wood anchorage devices not permitted.
2. Where anchor bolts or like devices have not been installed, provide appropriate type anchors for
construction conditions. Devices having lead, plastic, wood or like materials are not acceptable.
3. Cut excess length anchor bolts using method not to damage threads.
END OF SECTION
AES127210 ELECTRONIC CLOCK SYSTEMS 13115 -6
18JAN08
Ic
P]
P]
• •
13
0
• •
i
v
A. EPSTEIN AND SONS INTERNATIONAL SECTION 14210
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS TRACTION ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents: Provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of the Contract, Drawings and
Division 1 - General Requirements of the Specification, apply to this Section.
B. Description: Traction elevators are indicated by Contract Documents and shall include work necessary
and incidental to completion and performance of the work.
C. Included: Traction elevators include, but are not limited to, following:
1. Electric traction corner post passenger elevators.
2. Electric traction sidewalk freight elevator.
3. Driving machines and appurtenances.
4. Hoistway equipment and entrances.
5. Cars.
6. Operating and safety devices by which elevators function in response to calls for service and in
response to programmed control systems.
7. Signal equipment, including control signals and communication system, and associated electrical
conduit, wiring and connections.
8. Elevator signage required by elevator codes and regulations.
9. Electrical power and lighting wiring from each elevator for elevator service.
10. Furnishing supports and details to be built -in supporting and associated construction for installation
of elevators.
11. Components necessary for complete, operational and safe elevator systems and equipment.
D. Types: Required types of elevator service include, but are not limited to, following:
1. Passenger elevator.
2. Sidewalk Freight elevator.
E. Schedules: Elevator schedules for each elevator or group of elevators, indicating required services,
performances, controls, capacities, features, finishes and like items, are specified in Article - Traction
Elevator Schedule, at end of this Section.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Traction Elevators: Systems in which cars are hoisted by wire ropes using electrically driven traction
sheaves and other components including, but not limited to, driving machines, car enclosures, hoistway
and car entrances, hoistway guards and fascias for items projecting into hoistway, control systems,
signal and communication equipment, guide rails, electrical wiring, buffers, and devices for operating,
dispatching, safety, security, leveling, alarm, maintenance and similar performances and capabilities.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of following, except to extent of most stringent requirements
of Contract Documents and of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on performance of
the work:
0 AESI 27210 TRACTION ELEVATORS
18JAN08
14210 -1
� o
1. ANSI A17.1 -Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators and Moving Walks, referred to in
this Section as the Elevator Code.
2. ANSI A17.2.3 - Inspector =s Manual for Elevators and Moving Walks.
3. ANSI A17.4 - Guide for Emergency Evacuation of Passengers from Elevators.
4. ANSI A17.5 - Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment.
5. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to, and Usable by, the
Physically Handicapped.
6. AWI - Quality Standards.
7. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
8. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
9. NEII - Standards for Passenger Elevators to Accommodate the Handicapped.
10. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).
11. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code (Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures).
12. OSHA 29CFR1910 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards.
13. USDOJ Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
14. Handicapped people accessibility codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on
performance of the Work.
B. Performance Basis:
1. General: Descriptions and requirements indicated by Contract Documents establish basic concepts,
dimensions, performance, function, operation and like requirements. Within these limitations, work
shall meet design criteria and like requirements indicated by Contract Documents, and include
components not indicated but necessary for performance and operation and to be a complete and
safe operating system. Perform modifications only as necessary to meet requirements of Contract
Documents and to coordinate the work, subject to acceptance by Architect. Maintain general design
concept. Variations shall not adversely affect durability and performance. Provide complete
drawings and data of proposed modifications.
2. Qualification: Contract Documents are intended to cover complete work and to outline products and
work required, but not to cover details of design and construction. Such details shall be responsibility
of manufacturer. Contract Documents do not invent or develop any part of work, but have made
only selections from choices made available by manufacturer.
3. Certification: Work shall be designed, certified, reviewed and inspected by engineer of Contractor
subject to minimum requirements of Contract Documents.
C. Performance Requirements:
1. General: Work shall meet or perform to design criteria and like requirements indicated by Contract
Documents, including requirements specified in this paragraph and in other parts of this Section with
normal maintenance as defined by maintenance manual of manufacturer.
2. Performance Conditions: Design of elevator work shall include live loads, wind loads, creep,
shrinkage, deflections, temperature variations, stresses, a )pansion and contraction requirements,
seismic forces, vibration, differential settlement and other like conditions meeting most stringent
requirements of Contract Documents and of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on
performance of the work.
3. Movements: Meet requirements of Section 01415 - Performance Requirements.
4. Performance:
a. Operational performance of elevator systems shall be without undue service failures and with
AESI 27210 TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 -2
18JAN08
• 0
maintenance requirements not in excess of those recognized as normal for the qualities and
characteristics specified.
b. Elevator systems shall operate without irregularities and as quietly as can be obtained by use of
prudent and current elevator design and engineering, quality products, and normal type
adjustments.
c. Prevent transmission of vibrations to building structure and elevator components from elevator
systems and equipment.
d. Noise or sound produced from elevator systems and equipment shall be of level which can be
prevented from transmission to adjacent spaces by building construction surrounding the system
and equipment, vibration isolator or like means. Provide sound attenuation, vibration isolators
and other means as required to reduce noise or sound levels.
5. Available Electric: As indicated in Elevator Schedule.
6. Hazardous Conditions: There shall be no projections, obstructions or rough surfaces that may be
hazardous to users of elevators in area of travel or possible contact with hydraulic elevators.
7. Handicap Standards: Passenger and passenger /service elevators shall accommodate
handicapped, including clearances, handrails, locations for signal equipment and similar provisions.
Meet requirements of all handicap accessibility codes and standards of public authorities bearing on
performance of the work. In case of differences between such codes and standards, meet most
stringent requirement or requirement which best accommodates handicapped.
8. Trademarks: Do not display manufacturer name or trademark on exposed surfaces of materials or
components, which can be seen by passengers using elevator systems.
D. Fire Resistance - Hoistway Entrances: Provide each hoistway entrance bearing UL Classification Mark
for B- Label, 1 -1 /2 -hour, fire doors with separate labels or hardware, sills, closures and other accessory
items. Meet requirements of NFPA 80 and NFPA 101 for construction and installation of hoistway
entrances.
1. FM Approval: In addition, include FM Approval Mark on components and assemblies.
2. Temperature Rise: Include 30 minute temperature rise limitation on labels.
3. Oversized Assemblies: Wherever hoistway entrance size exceeds limits established for investigation
and testing, provide certification of manufacturer that assembly has been constructed with materials
and methods equivalent to requirements for labeled construction, including copy of Agency
authorization to certify.
E. Tolerances:
1. Car Leveling: Position stopping car and maintain car with car floor level with each landing within 1/4
inch, up or down, regardless of travel direction, size or weight of load (within ratings), and load
carried during loading and unloading.
2. Elevator Travel: Plumb and secure guide rails within tolerances required by ANSI A17.1 and
elevator manufacturer.
3. Metal Flatness: Flat metal sheet and panels shall have exterior surfaces of such flatness that
maximum slope of surface at any point, measured from nominal plane of surface, shall notexceed
AESI 27210 TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 -3
18JAN08
G 0
1.25 percent.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Responsibility: Elevator work shall be performed by a single elevator manufacturer having
undivided responsibility for providing complete elevator systems.
B. Product Qualification:
1. Provide elevators for the work produced by one manufacturer for each type of operation.
2. Insofar as possible, each product shall be a standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged
in manufacture of such product. Manufacturer shall perform whatever modifications or additions to
such standard products required for product to meet requirements of Contract Documents.
Products shall be of current design documented by product data of manufacturer.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer shall be experienced and specializing in design,
engineering, manufacture, installation and maintenance of type traction elevators and appurtenances
required for the work as specified in Part 2 of this Section.
D. Component Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide car enclosures, signal equipment and other
components of elevator systems produced by elevator manufacturer or bycompanies experienced and
specializing in types of components required for the work as acceptable to elevator manufacturer.
E. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or a licensee of the manufacturer, who has 5 years
minimum certifiable experience in type, installation and maintenance of type and quality required for
work. Installer shall maintain and have maintained a service center with parts inventory and
manufacturer trained personnel within approximately 50 miles of project site for 5 years minimum. Upon
request, provide proof of qualifications.
F. Engineer of Contractor Qualifications: Professional engineer of Contractor licensed to practice in
jurisdiction where the work is located and experienced in providing engineering services that have
resulted in successful installation and performance of hydraulic elevator work similar in design, material
and extent to that required for the work.
G. Laboratory Testing: Meet requirements of ANSI A17.1 for laboratory testing of elevator component
parts, materials and products used in elevator work. Label such products and materials to indicate
testing and certification by laboratory.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination:
1. Performance Certification: Prior to or concurrent with any other submittal required for work, submit
design certification specified in this Article.
2. Supporting Structure Loadings: Prior to submittal of shop drawings for any portion of building
structure, submit shop drawings for work indicating maximum static and dynamic load reactions
imparted to supporting structure, locations of reactions, and proposed connection details signed and
sealed by engineer of Contractor who performed design work. Changes to supporting structure
resulting from failure to meet this requirement shall be made at expense of Contractor, at no
addition to Contract Sum.
AESI 27210 TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 -4 j
18JAN08
0
B. Product Data: Submit product specifications, technical data, standard detail drawings and installation
instructions of manufacturer for each elevator system, and for each component or product in system.
Include published data or certified test data of manufacturer indicating that elevators meet requirements
of Contract Documents. Include a complete listing and description of performance, operating
characteristics, control systems and like items, clearly indicating any modifications from requirements
specked and how these differences in every case exceed minimum requirements of Contract
Documents.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. General: Submit shop drawings for each elevator system and appurtenances, including details of
assembly and installation. Organize shop drawings into one coordinated submittal. Shop drawings
shall indicate following:
a. Elevatoring diagrams showing service to each landing served, travel distances and similar
considerations of elevator work.
b. Reactions, maximum static and dynamic loads imparted by elevator work to supporting building
structure, locations of reactions and loads, and connection details.
c. Details of support and anchorage to supporting building structure.
d. Indicate proper relation to adjacent work.
e. Coordination requirements with adjacent work.
f. Plans, elevations and details of cars enclosures and hoistway entrances.
g. Maximum and average electrical power demands, and wiring diagrams for entire system of
power distribution, lighting, control, signals, communication and like systems.
2. Certification: Shop drawings for work shall be certified and sealed by engineer of Contractor stating
work meets most stringent requirements of Contract Documents.
D. Samples: Submit samples of each finish for elevator work exposed in the completed work, including car
enclosures, entrances, and signal equipment units, push buttons, lights, graphics and mounting
provisions, except materials intended for painting after installation. Submit manufacturer standard size
samples of actual finished materials or fabricated work to show profile, pattern, color and texture.
Review of samples by Architect will be only for visual characteristics.
E. Certificates and Test Reports:
1. Submit written, certified reports of required tests, recording dates performed, test method
(description), test results, interpretation of results, and recommended action. Where required,
submit additional copies directly to governing authorities.
2. Provide certificates and operating permits to Owner for each elevator, obtained from governing
authorities, as necessary for normal, unrestricted use of elevators.
F. Performance Certification: Submit design certification prepared, certified and sealed by engineer of
Contractor who performed design work, indicating work meets most stringent requirements of Contract
Documents and of codes and regulations of public authorities bearing on performance of the work.
0 AESI 27210 TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 -5
18JAN08
in, J91UzX
A. General: Meet instructions and recommendations of manufacturers for handling, storing and protecting
products.
B. Coating Protection: Protect finished surfaces with a strippable plastic or paper type coating. Do not
remove coating until completion of the work, except as necessitated by installation after which time
coating shall be replaced.
C. Built -In Items: Promptly deliver accessories and details to be built -in supporting construction. Furnish
final reviewed setting drawings, diagrams, templates and instructions for installation of built -in
accessories and details.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with adjacent work for proper interface and sequence.
B. Temporary Elevator Use: Meet applicable provisions of Conditions of the Contract and requirements of
Division 1 - General Requirements of Specification for use of permanent elevator systems during
building construction period.
C. Protection: Provide surveillance and protection of elevator work to prevent damage and deterioration
regardless of whether elevator is placed in temporary service.
1.08 MAINTENANCE
A. General Maintenance: For a period of 12 months following date of substantial completion, provide full
maintenance of elevator work on a systematic inspection and maintenance basis. Correct operational
faults and restore or replace defective or deteriorated components and finishes. Lubricate operational
units and supply expendable materials as required for proper operations and maintenance. Proceed
with repair and maintenance work within 24 hours from time Owner reports a defective operation.
B. Continuing Maintenance: Installer shall confer with Owner on requirements for a complete elevator
maintenance program. Provide continuing maintenance proposal to Owner, inform of a standard yearly
maintenance agreement, starting on date Contract maintenance requirements are concluded. State
services, obligations, conditions and terms for agreement period, and for renewal options.
C. Manual and Instructions:
1. Manual: Furnish operating and maintenance manual for each type of elevator. Contents shall
include operating and maintenance instructions, parts listings, recommended parts inventory,
purchase source listing, emergency instructions and similar information.
2. Instructions: Instruct personnel of Owner in proper use, operations and maintenance of elevators.
Review emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time
of failure in operation and other building emergencies. Train personnel in normal procedures to be
followed in checking for sources of operational failures or malfunctions.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. General: Warranty traction elevator work meeting provisions of Conditions of the Contract, except
warranty shall include the additional requirements specified in this Article.
B. Coverage:
AESI 27210 TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 -6
18JAN08
1. General: Defective materials, equipment and workmanship shall include, but not be limited to,
operational failures, performance below required minimums, abnormal deterioration or aging,
evidence that system will not be reasonably maintainable for life of building, abnormal wear
considering intensity of use, unsafe conditions, excessive noise or vibration, and similar unusual,
unexpected and unsatisfactory conditions; but does not include defects caused by acts of God,
alterations, abusive use, vandalism, failure of the support structure or power supply, improper
maintenance and similar causes beyond control of Contractor, installer and elevator manufacturer.
2. Extent: Warranty shall extend to corrections of work found to be defective or nonconforming to
Contract Documents at no change in Contract Sum. Included, shall be correction of damages
resulting from such defects or nonconformance, exclusive of repair required or a result of improper
maintenance or operation, or of normal wear.
C. Costs: Warranty shall be without cost limitation and at no expense to Owner.
D. Signatures: Warranty shall be signed by Contractor, installer and manufacturer.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Passenger Elevator:
1. ThyssenKrupp Elevator Corporation or equal
B. Sidewalk Freight Elevator:
1. Gillespie Corporation Model PS1 E -1 or equal.
2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer elevator systems which meet requirements of this Section. Where
components are not otherwise indicated, provide components as required for a complete system.
B. Materials:
1. Structural Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A36 minimum.
2. Cold - Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A366 and ASTM A568, commercial quality, roller - leveled, uniform
matte finish for surfaces to be exposed in the completed work or to be painted. Thickness shall be
as required or appropriate for service and application.
3. Stainless Steel:
a. Plate and Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304, AISI Number 4 Finish, and of thickness as required or
appropriate for service and application.
b. Shapes and Bars: ASTM A276, Type 304, AISI Number 4 Finish, of profile and dimensions as
required or appropriate for service and application.
4. Aluminum - Extruded: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063 -T6, or ASTM B308, Alloy 6061 -T6.
IV AESI 27210 TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 -7
18JAN08
a
5. Exposed Fasteners: Countersunk oval head screws with Phillips drive slot and of same material and
finish as base metal being fastened.
6. Prime Paint: Rust inhibitive enamel paint suitable and compatible as a base for required finish
paints.
7. Finish Paint System: Enamel finish paint system, which is resistant to damage from abrasion and
graffiti.
8. Non -Shrink Grout: Premixed, non - shrink cement based grout. Grout shall be ready -to -use, non-
metallic aggregate product requiring only addition of water at project site, meeting requirements of
USACE CRD -C621 and ASTM C1107, and shall produce a flowable grouting material having no
drying shrinkage at any age and 4.0 percent maximum expansion when evaluated meeting
requirements of ASTM C827. Compressive strength of grout (2" x 2" cubes) shall be 5,000 psi
minimum at 7 days and 6,500 psi minimum at 28 days when evaluated meeting requirements of
ASTM C109, except grout shall be restrained from expansion by a top plate.
C. Metal Panel Construction: For exposed flat metal panels of width exceeding 8 inches, provide
laminated construction, of sheet metal face and back with plywood cores. Apply sound deadening
coating, of fibrated compound on concealed back surfaces of narrower panels and moldings where
formed of sheet metal.
D. Supports and Anchors: Furnish supports and anchors to be installed in supporting construction during
construction of hoistways, pits and control rooms for installation of elevator machines, rails, hoistway
entrances and like elevator components requiring anchorage or support.
E. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating elevator equipment and components on vibration
absorption mounts, designed to prevent the transmission of vibrations to structure, and thereby eliminate
the sources of structure borne noise resulting from operation of elevator system.
F. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for fabrication of elevator work wherever bolted
connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection,
maintenance and replacement of worn parts. Meet requirements of AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3, as
applicable.
G. Finishes:
1. Exposed Surfaces:
a. General: As indicated for application or component.
b. Prime Painted: Clean, treat and paint ferrous metal surfaces of elevator work required to receive
a primer for painting after installation.
1) Clean metal surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt and other foreign materials before
application of prime paint.
2) Apply pretreatment to cleaned metal surfaces, using cold phosphate solution (SSPC P12),
hot phosphate solution (SSPC PT4) or basic zinc chromate -vinyl butyral solution (SSPC
PT3).
3) Apply prime paint within time limits recommended by pretreatment manufacturer. Apply a
smooth coat of even consistency to provide a uniform 2.0 mil minimum dry film thickness.
AESI 27210 TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 -8
18JAN08
0 o
C. Finish Painted: Meet requirement specified in Paragraph - Prime Painted. Finish surface shall
be smooth and of even consistency. Provide a uniform 3.5 mil minimum dry film paint system
thickness.
d. Stainless Steel: AISI Number 4 finish.
2. Concealed Surfaces: Prime and finish paint concealed ferrous metal surfaces of elevator work,
except lubricated rails, shafts and like wearing surfaces, and surfaces specified to receive either a
different finish or primer for finish painting after installation. Prepare surfaces and remove mill scale,
rust, oil, grease, dirt and other foreign materials, and apply one coat of rust inhibitive primer and one
coat of metal enamel of 2.0 mils minimum dry film thickness, manufacturer standard color. Apply
finish at shop before delivery, to greatest extent possible.
2.03 ELEVATOR OPERATIONS
A. General: Provide each elevator or group of elevators with automatic operation where the starting and
stopping of elevator cars at landings is effected in response to momentary actuation of signal buttons
located in elevator car and at hoistway landings, or in response to other operating and safety devices.
B. Primary Operations: Provide following primary operation for each elevator or group of elevators as
indicated in Elevator Schedule:
1. Passenger Elevator: Simplex Selective Collective: Provide simplex selective collective automatic
operation meeting applicable definitions and requirements of ANSI A17.1. In addition, operation
shall provide following:
a. Elevator car shall not reverse direction of travel until reaching extremity of calls, pausing for 5
,
seconds and closing doors.
b. Calls shall be canceled by elevator travel and shall be replaced if not serviced.
c. Landing stop shall be adjustable to 20 seconds maximum before doors automatically close
d. When no calls are registered, elevator car shall return to park landing as indicated in Elevator
Schedule.
2. Sidewalk Freight Elevator: Single Automatic: Provide single automatic operation meeting
applicable definitions and requirements of ANSI A17.1.
a. Landing stop shall be adjustable to 20 seconds maximum before doors automatically close.
C. Auxiliary Operations: Provide following additional operations for each elevator as indicated in Elevator
Schedule:
1. Manual Door Controls: Car station buttons for door open and door close for power operated doors.
2. Inspection Operation: Top -of -car station meeting requirements of ANSI A17.1.
3. Independent Operation: Car shall respond only to car calls under independent operation and not
cancel hall calls registered for landings at which car stops. Independent car operation shall be
actuated by key activated switch in car control station.
4. Emergency Operation: Emergency operation for fireman and like emergency services shall be
40 AESI 27210 TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 -9
18JAN08
actuated by key activated switch initially at parking landing adjacent to hoistway entrance and in car
control station. Car shall immediately return to parking landing in response to call for emergency
service, bypassing car and hall calls which may be registered, and parking with does open. Turn of
keyed switch in car shall cancel car calls and causes elevator to bypass hall calls. Car shall
respond only to door close button; newly registered car calls, traveling directly to floor selected, and
door open button. Removal of key shall return elevator to normal service.
5. Fire and Smoke Detector Operation: Each car shall respond to signal received from any fire and
smoke detector sensor at any elevator lobby or associated elevator control room of respective
elevator. Meet requirements of ANSI All 7.1. Coordinate operation with fire and smoke detector
system provided under fire alarm specifications. Car shall immediately return to parking landing in
response to signal, except car shall return to landing adjacent to parking landing if fire and smoke
alarm originated at parking landing elevator lobby.
2.04 PASSENGER ELEVATOR MACHINES AND COMPONENTS
A. General: Provide elevator machines and associated components which will fulfill requirements of
elevator work, is consistent with operational complexity of elevator system and equipment and is
designed for application, including location of installation and distances between components, and as
indicated in Elevator Schedule.
B. Driving Machine:
1. General: Provide type of driving machine indicated in Elevator Schedule, designed for travel and
speed requirements of elevator.
2. Gearless Machine:
a. General: Gearless traction type with motor, brake and traction sheave mounted directly on
motor shaft. Provide sound isolation pads to reduce vibration and noise transmission to building
structure.
b. Motor: Alternating current type designed for elevator service with high starting torque and low
starting current and with devices to protect against overloading.
3. Drive: Variable voltage variable frequency alternating current drive system. Motor speed and
torque shall be controlled by varying frequency and amplitude of alternating current voltage.
System shall be non - regenerative.
C. Governor: Car safety operated by a speed governor which shall activate a switch when excessive speed
occurs, disconnecting power to motor and applying brake before application of safety.
D. Controller Unit:
1. General: Provide equipment designed to control starting and stopping, to protect motor from
damage due to overload or excess current, and to cut -off power and bring car to rest in the event of
safety device operation or other possible events which might result in malfunction of elevators.
2. Type: Micro - computer based control system shall be provided to perform all functions of safe
elevator operation. Also, system shall perform car and group operational control.
a. Supervisory Control: Microprocessor based group automatic system with ETA based algorithmic
dispatching.
AES127210 TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 -10
18JAN08
• •
b. Operational Control: Microprocessor based selective collective.
c. Motor Control: Digitally controlled ac variable frequency with digital closed loop feedback.
3. High Voltage: Protect contact points of 110 volts or more inside controller cabinet from accidental
contact in a situation where controller doors are open.
4. Electrical Devices: Equip controller unit with electrical and electronic devices needed to perform
specified operations of elevator. Use flame resistant wiring, neatly formed and tied to panels.
2.05 PASSENGER HOISTWAY AND CAR EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide hoistway and car equipment which will fulfill requirements of the elevator work and is
consistent with operational comple)aty of elevator system and equipment, and as indicated in Elevator
Schedule.
B. Car Frame and Platform:
1. General: Rigid steel construction with platform mounted on frame with vibration isolation pads.
Undercoat platforms with sound deadening material.
C. Guide Rails: Steel T- section elevator guide rails with V- tongue and groove joints, accurately machined
surfaces in contact with car guides, and of weight and other properties meeting requirements of ANSI
A17.1. Include clamps, brackets and fasteners as required.
D. Guide Rollers: Rubber -tired guide rollers for elevator service.
E. Hoist Ropes: Lang lay, right hand, type made with traction steel wire; consisting of at least eight strands
wound about a sisal core. Rope size, construction and number shall insure proper operation of elevator
and give satisfactory wearing qualities. Governor ropes shall be steel.
F. Compensating Chains: Provide in arrange as required by manufacturer when required to maintain
adequate traction on elevator hoisting machine drive sheave. Chain shall be encased in a foam plastic
material impregnated with lead shot.
G. Protection Guards: Provide fascias, toe guards, dust covers and sight guards in hoistway for elevator
equipment and components meeting requirements of ANSI A17.1.
1. Arrange protection guards for convenient access and removal to equipment concealed by guards,
and in a manner to provide minimum clearances.
2. Fabricate guards of cold - rolled steel of 14 gage minimum. Reinforce as required to insure flat,
uniform surfaces, and even joints.
3. After fabrication, provide factory applied enamel paint finish of manufacturer standard color.
H. Buffers: Suitable oil type buffers with necessary steel blocking and supports at bottom limits of travel
under each elevator car and counterweight.
I. Traveling Cables: Provide composite type traveling cables with steel wire support strands designed for
elevator service.
1. Traveling cables shall be sufficiently fle)able to readily adapt to all changes in position of elevator car
0 AESI 27210 TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 -11
18JAN08
Q
and hang straight without twist or tendency to twist and perform without any permanent set and
without cracking of outer covering.
2. Traveling cables shall include communication cabling. Provide shielded wires for communication.
3. Each traveling cable conductor shall have a distinctive coded outer covering for identification.
4. Provide strain devices as required for connecting the supporting strands and relieving the
conductors of the traveling cables of strain.
5. Terminal blocks shall have indelible identification numbers for each terminal connection.
6. Swing of trail cables shall be checked when elevator is running. Provide shields and pads
necessary to prevent chafing. Loop in traveling cables shall be 2 feet minimum.
J. Hoistway Wiring: Provide wiring and conduit in hoistway adequate for proper and safe operation of
equipment. Multi- conductor type wiring for light and signal circuits shall be used in elevator hoistway.
Conductors shall be copper.
K. Devices: Provide following devices for each elevator only as indicated in Elevator Schedule:
1. Pit Safety Stop Switch: Safety switch in each hoistway pit accessible from entrance to pit. Safety
switch shall interrupt power supply and bring and hold elevator car at rest independent of normal
operating devices to permit safe access to pit.
2. Car Leveling Device: Adjustable two -way automatic leveling device which shall position and
maintain car floor level, within specked tolerance, with each landing for which a stop is initiated
regardless of travel direction, size or weight of load (within ratings), and load carried during loading
and unloading. Car shall, at all times, level into landing and shall not stop above or below landing
and level back.
2.06 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide signal equipment for each elevator or group of elevators which will fulfill requirements
of the elevator work, is consistent with operational complexity of elevator systems and equipmentand as
indicated in Elevator Schedule.
B. Equipment: Provide illuminated buttons and signals which light up when activated and remain lighted
until call or other function has been fulfilled, fabricate of plastic. Except for buttons and illuminated
signal elements, fabricate signal equipment with exposed surfaces of stainless steel.
1. Exposed Materials:
a. Metal: Stainless steel with AISI Number 4 Finish.
b. Plastic: Non - yellowing and non - crazing, translucent white or water clear as applicable, virgin
acrylic plastic for maximum durability and life.
c. Lamps: Provide full set of light bulbs in illuminated signal equipment.
2. Call Buttons:
a. General: Non - cancelable illuminated type required where light extinguishes when call is
answered of either mechanical - electrical or electronic type with silver -to- silver contacts.
AESI 27210 TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 -12
18JAN08
• •
73
b. Type - Plastic: Flat design translucent white plastic face with graphics when applicable and white
illuminating indicator.
3. Vandal Resistance: Signal equipment exposed to view in the completed work shall be of vandal
resistance design and construction, including any exposed fasteners.
C. Car Control Stations: Provide surface mounted metal face plates containing call button for each landing
and hoistway door served, and other push buttons controls and keyed switches required for operations
and control of required devices and equipment. Mount in car at location indicated in Elevator Schedule.
Provide identification of each signal and control, and provide illuminated indicator of next travel
direction.
D. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated digital display type located near top of car control station.
Include audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each floor
served. Also, provide illuminated direction indicator of next travel signal if not provided in car control
station. Match mounting method required for car control station.
E. Hall Call Station:
1. Provide hall push button call station at each landing for each hoistway entrance to elevator car for
each single elevator group. Call shall cancel when elevator car stops at landing in response to call.
Locate button stations at location most convenient for approaching passengers.
2. Provide type with face plate for surface mounting on wall finish (body of unit recessed). In addition,
provide face plate with integral engraved and colored elevator hall call station pictograph meeting
requirements of ANSI A17.1, Appendix H.
D
3. Selective Collective Operation: Provide 2 button stations where travel is available in either direction;
1 -button station where only one direction of travel is available. Furnish each button with a call light
and graphics indicating direction for travel.
F. Hall Direction Lanterns:
1. Provide hall direction lanterns with illuminated up and down signals prior to arrival of elevator car at
landing, but only one signal where only one direction is possible. Light shall extinguish when door
closes. Provide units projecting from face plate for ease of angular viewing, except provide flush
units where a location in hoistway entrance frame is required. Match mounting method required for
hall push button stations.
2. In addition, equip lanterns with an audible signal which sounds prior to arrival of elevator car at
landing. Audible signal shall sound to indicate car arrival and travel direction, once for up direction
and twice for down direction.
G. Car Telephone:
General: Provide a two -way, multi- conversational telephone and alarm signaling system between
elevator cars and outside 24 hour telephone line service, terminated in respective control room,
complete with identification and instructions. Equipment shall be equipped for extension of
communication to outside telephone line service. Operation in car shall be hands -free. System
shall meet requirements for handicapped people, including hearing impaired and visually impaired
individuals, and shall be registered by FCC.
2. Operation:
IV AESI 27210 TRACTION ELEVATORS
18JAN08
14210 -13
E
X
a. Provide hands -free telephone with autodialer, speaker cutout or speaker module with an integral
microphone mounted inside elevator car control station. Telephone shall be activated by
pressing one of three buttons, separate push -to -talk button, elevator stop button, if not keyed, or
alarm button, all mounted on face of car control station.
b. When activated, telephone shall automatically dial a preprogrammed number and a
prerecorded, digitized voice shall inform answering station of building location of elevator; then
telephone shall allow two -way voice communication.
c. Telephone shall have two emitting diodes, one to signal passenger that call is in progress and
one to signal that call has been acknowledged by answering station.
d. Provide means for a deaf /mute passenger to signal to answering station after answering station
has acknowledged call.
e. Telephone shall be easily programmed and allow incoming calls to be received from answering
source.
3. Other Work: Dedicated touch -tone telephone line service terminated in machine room is not part of
work under this Section. Connect telephone line to elevator telephone system.
H. Alarm System: Provide emergency alarm bell equipped to sound automatically in response to
emergency stops and in response to alarm button in each car control station. Locate alarm bell
meeting requirements of ANSI A17.1, except any location outside of hoistway shall be as acceptable to
Architect.
2.07 PASSENGER CAR ENCLOSURES
A. General:
1. Description: Provide passenger elevator car enclosures of materials, finishes, accessories and
selections indicated in this Article and as indicated in Elevator Schedule.
2. Definition: Passenger elevator car enclosures are defined to include, but are not limited to, floors,
walls, ceilings, finishes, ventilation, lighting, access and emergency doors and panels, trim,
hardware and accessories, but does not include doors, door sills, signal equipment, and operating
and safety devices.
3. Fabrication: Fabricate car enclosure with recesses, cut -outs, reinforcing and details to
accommodate accessories, signal equipment and other devices.
B. Walls and Base:
1. Door Walls - Stainless Steel:
Integrally formed hollow metal panels fabricated from stainless steel sheet of 0.060 inch
minimum thickness.
b. Fabricate panels with no joints and with hairline joints between adjacent panels and other work.
c. Finish shall be as specked for material.
2. Side and Back Walls - Special: Forms + Surfaces, CabForm Series 3000 -C Interior Finish System.
Main panels and base shall be stainless steel with sandstone finish. Accent panel shall be bonded
AESI 27210 TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 -14
18JAN08
•
•
nickel silver, pattern Chardonnay with light patina. Corner reveals and grid frames shall be extruded
aluminum, clear anodized finish. Handrail, grip and standoffs shall be stainless steel, classic
design, polished US 32 finish.
3. Side Walls - Plywood Subwall: Provide 5/8 inch minimum thickness marine plywood over steel
elevator wall as substrate for applied finish material when indicated in Elevator Schedule.
4. Base: Provide base with concealed ventilation ports.
C. Subfloor: Provide 5/8 inch minimum thickness marine plywood subfloor over steel elevator platform
when indicated in Elevator Schedule.
D. Wall Covering: As indicated in Elevator Schedule.
E. Base Covering: As indicated in Elevator Schedule.
F. Floor Covering: As indicated in Elevator Schedule.
G. Ventilation: Provide car ventilation meeting requirements of ANSI A17.1. Minimal noise or vibration
shall result from function or operation of ventilation system as acceptable to Architect. Equip fan with
keyed on-off switch located in car control panel.
H. Ceiling and Lighting: Forms + Surfaces, CabForms, Series 3000 -C Ceiling and Lighting System.
Ceiling system shall be stainless steel, sandstone finish panel grid system. Reveals shall be painted
black. Ceiling lighting shall be recessed 20 Watts low voltage halogen downlights.
I. Emergency Lighting: Provide emergency lighting meeting requirements of ANSI A17.1.
J. Handrails and Guardrails: Provide handrails and guardrails on side walls and back walls as applicable,
is I fabricated of stainless steel with AISI Number 4 finish by Forms + Surfaces.
K. Certificate Display: Tamperproof metal frame integrated flush with front panels with acrylic window,
sized to match inspection certificate form of governing authority.
L. Signs: Provide NO SMOKING sign in each car, with 1 inch high letters, integrated flush with front
panels.
M. Protective Blanket Lining: Provide removable and reversible protective blanket lining for front, side and
rear walls of car enclosures. Blanket lining shall be padded and quilted heavy cotton duck with
continuous edging, and grommets aligned with location of blanket hooks. Arrange blanket units and
hooks for universal and interchangeable use. Provide openings in blankets as required for access to
controls and like devices. Provide stainless steel blanket hooks in each passenger type car, regardless
of whether indicated in Elevator Schedule, to receive blanket lining.
2.08 PASSENGER HOISTWAY AND CAR ENTRANCES
A. General:
1. Provide passenger hoistway and car entrances of sizes, door and frame types, finishes and
accessory provisions as indicated in this Article, prepared for hardware, anchorage, signal
equipment and accessories, and as indicated in Elevator Schedule.
2. Provide hollow metal type, sliding, door and frame entrances complete with track systems, operator,
hardware, safeties, sills and accessories.
40 AESI 27210 TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 -15
18JAN08
r_*�_
3. Doors for hoistway and car shall match for size, quantity of door panels and door movement.
B. Hoistway Door Panels and Frames - Painted Steel:
1. Material: Cold- rolled steel sheet.
2. Frame Details:
a. Hollow metal construction of profile required and of size to coordinate with adjacent hoistway
wall construction. Provide 14 gauge minimum.
b. Reinforce head section to provide sufficient strength without support from wall lintels.
c. Full- welded unit construction, continuously welded through full throat at inside of frames and at
face and return edges of frame, and finished to match surface finish of parent metal.
3. Door Panel Details: Hollow metal construction, flush design. Provide 16 gauge minimum. Securely
mount gib components to lower edge of each door panel to guide horizontal motion of door panels.
4. Finish: After fabrication and before assembly, provide Scuttmaster, solid metal finish paint system of
color of manufacturer as selected by Architect.
5. Sound Deadening: Provide sound - deadening coating on concealed surfaces.
C. Hoistway Door Panels and Frames - Stainless Steel:
1. Material: Stainless steel sheet.
2. Frame Details:
a. Hollow metal construction of profile required and of size to coordinate with adjacent hoistway
wall construction. Provide 0.075 inch minimum thickness.
b. Reinforce head section to provide sufficient strength without support from wall lintels.
c. Full- welded unit construction with mitered corners, continuously welded through full throat at
inside of frames and at face and return edges of frame, and finished to match surface finish of
parent metal.
3. Door Panel Details: Hollow metal construction, flush design. Provide 0.060 inch minimum
thickness. Securely mount gib components to lower edge of each door panel to guide horizontal
motion of door panels.
4. Finish: As specified for material.
5. Sound Deadening: Provide sound - deadening coating on concealed surfaces.
D. Car Door Panels and Frames - Stainless Steel:
1. Material: Stainless steel sheet.
2. Frame Details:
a. Hollow metal construction of size to coordinate with adjacent car wall construction. Provide
0.060 inch minimum thickness.
AESI 27210 TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 -16
18JAN08
b. Comers with mechanical joints and concealed fasteners.
3. Door Panel Details: Hollow metal construction, flush design. Provide 0.060 inch minimum
thickness. Securely mount gib components to lower edge of each door panel to guide horizontal
motion of door panels.
4. Finish: As specified for material.
E. Hoistway and Car Sills: Metal of type as indicated in Elevator Schedule, grooved for door guides, and
with grooved surface filled with anti -slip strips, 1/4 inch minimum thickness metal at grooved ribs. Each
sill unit shall be one piece for entire width and length of application, except as otherwise acceptable to
Architect.
F. Hoistway and Car Door Hangers: Provide hoistway and car door hangers and tracks for each hoistway
and car door. Door tracks shall be constructed of high strength bar steel with the working surface
machined and contoured to match the door sheaves. Hangers shall be designed for powered operation
and have provisions for vertical and lateral adjustment. Hangers shall be designed for two point
suspension of each door panel. Hanger sheaves shall be polyurethane tired and with prelubricated and
sealed for life bearings.
G. Door Operators: Provide gearless door operator and solid state control with direct current motor to
open and close car and hoistway doors simultaneously. Operating speed of doors at exposed edges
shall not be less than 2.5 feet per second. Door movement shall be cushioned or checked at both limits
of travel. Provide an electro- mechanical interlock on each hoistway door to prevent operation of
elevator unless all doors are closed and locked. Provide an electric contact on car door to prevent
operation of elevator unless car door is closed.
1. Door motor speeds shall be independently field adjustable by trim type potentiometers located
t within solid state motor control unit located on car top. Provide emergency devices and keys for
opening doors from landing as required by public authorities bearing on performance of the work.
2. Doors shall open automatically when car is leveling at respective landing, and shall close after a
predetermined time interval or immediately on pressing a door close button in car. Provide a door
open button in car, momentary pressing which shall reopen doors and reset time interval. Also,
provide a door close button in the car, momentary pressing which shall close doors.
H. Door Protective Device: Provide elevator car entrances with a multi-beam array light -ray type door
protective device.
1. When doors are in full open position, doors shall be unable to initiate closing if one or more of the
beams are interrupted by a person or object. If one or more of the beams are interrupted while
doors are closing, doors shall stop and reopen. Doors shall remain open until expiration of a time
interval and then close automatically.
2. After a stop is made, doors shall remain open to permit traffic, after which doors shall close
automatically. Time interval shall be less for a car call than for a hall call or a coincident call/hall
call.
3. If either a hall call anywhere in group or a car call in car in question and doors are prevented from
closing for a fixed time period, door protective device shall be rendered inoperative, a buzzer shall
sound in car alerting passengers to stand clear of door and doors shall close at approximately half
speed. Normal door operation shall resume at next landing reached by car.
I. Nudging Feature: Equip door protective device with an anti -delay operation feature which shall proceed
AESI 27210 TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 -17
18JAN08
N
to close doors at reduced speed after a predetermined adjustable time.
1. Provide reduced speed door closing in conjunction with door protective device.
2. Interruption of door protective device while doors are closing shall cause door speed to be reduced.
3. Doors shall accelerate to normal closing speed when door protective device is restored or reopen if
device is interrupted. If doors are reopened by door protective device, doors shall begin closing
again immediately.
4. Provide a buzzer which shall sound if door is held open for a predetermined adjustable time, alerting
passenger to stand clear of door. Buzzer shall operate in conjunction with door protective device.
Buzzer shall continue to sound until door obstruction is removed.
J. Emergency Opening: Provide means to manually open hoistway and car doors in an emergency
situation with elevator car at landing, without primary electric power and not damaging doors, door
operator and appurtenances.
2.09 SIDEWALK FREIGHT MACHINES AND COMPONENTS
A. General: Provide elevator machines and associated components which will fulfill requirements of
elevator work, is consistent with operational compleiaty of elevator system and equipment and is
designed for application, including location of installation and distances between components, and as
indicated in Elevator Schedule.
B. Driving Machine:
1. General: Provide type of driving machine indicated in Elevator Schedule, designed for Class A
freight loading conforming with requirements of ANSVASME A17.1. Frame and platform to be
constructed of structural A36 steel.
2. Lifting Machine: Machine to be comprised of electric motor, electric or mechanical brake, gear
reducer, double grooved drum with flanges, steel keyed shaft, shaft end support bearing, slack
cable device with reset switch, screw limit switch, structural steel base and steel pit strap.
C. Governor: Car safety operated by a speed governor which shall activate a switch when excessive speed
occurs, disconnecting power to motor and applying brake before application of safety.
D. Controller Unit:
1. General: Manufacturer's standard relay lobic controller with steel enclosure and weather resistant
normal and final shaftway limit switches conforming with referenced codes.
E. Cab and Platform: Manufacturer's standard structural steel construction, minimum 3/16" diamond plate
platform floor, 6-0" high 16 ga. Steel wall panels reinforced with steel angles, steel scissors type `Lazy
Tong' folding gate with 4'0" x 6' -8" clear opening, one bow light.
F. Sidewalk doors: Manufacturer's standard complete rustproof weather resistant assemblywith recessed
preformed gutters, nonferrous bronze hinges and pipe connections for drainage. Door plates to be
designed for 300 psf or per code whichever is greater. Finish to be non -slip diamond plate.
G. Control Stations: Manufactuer's standard weatherproof constant contact control stations, one at each
landing. Keyed to match building standard.
H. Lower Level Hoistway Door Panel and Frame - Stainless Steel:
1. Material: Stainless steel sheet.
AESI 27210 TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 -18
18JAN08
o •
2. Frame Details:
a. Hollow metal construction of profile required and of size to coordinate with adjacent hoistway
wall construction. Provide 0.075 inch minimum thickness. 4'0"x 6' -8" clear opening.
b. Reinforce head section to provide sufficient strength without support from wall lintels.
c. Full- welded unit construction with mitered comers, continuously welded through full throat at
inside of frames and at face and return edges of frame, and finished to match surface finish of
parent metal.
3. Door Panel Details: Hollow metal construction, flush design. Provide 0.060 inch minimum
thickness. Securely mount gib components to lower edge of each door panel to guide horizontal
motion of door panels. Provide safety interlock with elevator platform. Provide 10" x 10" safety
glazed vision panel.
4. Finish: #4 Brushed Stainless Steel.
5. Sound Deadening: Provide sound - deadening coating on concealed surfaces.
I. Signal Equipment: Provide signal equipment for elevator which will fulfill requirements of the elevator
work, is consistent with operational complexity of elevator systems and equipment.
1. Equipment: Provide illuminated buttons and signals which light up when activated and remain
lighted until call or other function has been fulfilled, fabricate of plastic. Except for buttons and
illuminated signal elements, fabricate signal equipment with exposed surfaces of stainless steel.
Provide visible and audible signal prior to sidewalk gate operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be installed for compliance with
requirements of Contract Documents and to determine if conditions affecting performance of work are
satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved.
Commencement of installation shall constitute acceptance of conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install work meeting requirements of Contract Documents, including requirements specified in
other parts of this Section, as indicated by final reviewed submittals for work, and meeting instructions
and recommendations of elevator manufacturer. Consult with manufacturer for conditions not covered
by printed instructions.
B. Support: Install elevator equipment and components true to line, level and plumb, within allowable
tolerances, and properly supported and anchored to supporting building structure.
C. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installation of elevator work where bolted
connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection,
maintenance and replacement of worn parts. Meet requirements of AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3, as
applicable.
D. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating elevator equipment and components on vibration
absorption mounts, designed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure, and thereby
is' AESI 27210 TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 -19
18JAN08
eliminate sources of structure borne noise from operation of elevator system.
E. Lubrication: Lubricate operating parts of systems, including bearings, tracks, guides and hardware, as
recommended by manufacturers.
F. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for
accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills and doors
until car is operable in hoistway. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each
landing.
G. Sills: Set sills provided under this Section accurately aligned and leveled with and slightly above
finished floor at landings. When required, grout sill with non -shrink grout.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Acceptance Testing: Upon nominal completion of each elevator installation, and before permitting use
of elevator, either temporary or permanent, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by
ANSI A17.1, and also perform other tests as required by public authorities bearing on performance of
the work.
B. Operating Tests: Load each elevator to its rated capacity and operate continuously for 30 minutes over
its full travel distance, stopping at each level and proceeding immediately to the next. Record
temperature rise of elevator machine during 30 minute test period. Record failures of elevator to
perform as required.
C. Notification: Advise Contractor, Owner, Architect and inspection department of public authorities
bearing on performance of the work, in advance of dates and times that tests are to be performed on
elevators.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjustments: Adjust components for smooth, efficient operation, free of hazardous conditions and
complying with required tolerances. Test operate devices, equipment, signals and controls.
B. Damages: Repair damaged components and finishes or, if damaged beyond an acceptable condition,
replace damaged component as acceptable to Architect. Repair or touch -up work shall match and
blend with parent finish as acceptable to Architect.
C. Final Check: Make a final check of operation of each elevator immediately prior to time of final
completion. Determine that control systems and operating devices are functioning properly.
3.05 TRACTION ELEVATOR SCHEDULE
A. Elevator 1:
1. General: Single elevator group with characteristics as indicated in this Schedule.
2. Type: Corner Post overhead geared traction.
3. Service: Passenger service.
4. Rated Capacity: 3,500 pounds.
5. Rated Speed: 350 feet per minute.
6. Platform Size: As indicated on Drawings.
7. Travel: 687.
8. Landings Served: 10, including landings M, G, G.5,1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7.
9. Hoistway Openings Served and Arrangement: 10.
10. Driving Machine: Geared drive machine.
AESI 27210 TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 -20
18JAN08
0 0
11.
Machine Location: Level 8.5, Tower machine room.
12.
Available Electric:
a. Power: 480 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hertz.
b. Lights: 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hertz.
13.
Primary Operation: Automatic with solid state microprocessor.
14.
Auxiliary Operations: As specked and include following:
a. Manual door control for power operated doors.
b. Inspection operation, top of car.
c. Independent operation.
d. Emergency operation, including fireman call.
e. Fire and smoke detector operation.
15.
Park Landing: Zoned car parking. Last floor landing served with hoistway and car doors closed,
except first floor landing for emergency operation, and fire and smoke detection operation.
16.
Hoistway and Car Equipment: As specked and include following:
a. Protection guards for elevator equipment and components.
b. Pit safety stop switch.
c. Car leveling device, automatic 2 -way leveling.
d. Emergency car return.
17. Signal Equipment: As specked and include following:
a. Car control station, one, mounted in left return panel adjacent to door.
b. Car control station, one, mounted in left return panel adjacent to door. Call and control switches,
except manual door controls and alarm, shall be key operated.
c. Car position indicator, one.
d. Car telephone system, one car telephone station located in car control station.
e. Hoistway signal equipment, including:
1) Hall call station at each landing for elevator group.
2) Hall direction lantern at each landing for each hoistway entrance.
f. Alarm system.
18. Car Enclosure: As indicated on Drawings, specked and include following:
a. Plywood subwalls over steel elevator side walls.
b. Plywood subfloor over steel elevator platform.
c. Floor finish material covering will be provided under another section.
d. Protective blanket wall lining.
e. Allow $30,000 for interior cab finish package.
19. Hoistway and Car Entrances: As specified and include following:
a. Clear Opening Size: As indicated on Drawings.
b. Function: Automatic, power operated horizontal slide, double leaf, center opening, one speed.
c. Emergency opening with device at each landing.
d. Hoistway Entrance Type and Finish: Frame and door of painted steel and stainless steel as
specified. Frame and doors of each landing shall be a color as required by Owner.
e. Car Entrance Type and Finish: Frame and door of stainless steel as specified.
f. Hoistway and Car Sills: Extruded aluminum, mill finish.
20. Additional Requirements: As indicated on Drawings and specified.
B. Elevator 2:
AES127210 TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 -21
18JAN08
E
1. General: Single elevator with characteristics as indicated in this Schedule.
2. Type: Sidewalk underslung geared traction.
3. Service: Freight service.
4. Rated Capacity: 1,500 pounds.
5. Rated Speed: 25 feet per minute.
6. Platform Size: As indicated on Drawings.
7. Travel: 12' -2 ".
8. Landings Served: 2, including landings M and G.
9. Hoistway Openings Served and Arrangement: 2.
10. Driving Machine: Geared drive machine.
11. Machine Location: Mall Level (M) machine room.
12. Available Electric:
a. Power: 480 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hertz.
b. Lights: 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hertz.
13. Primary Operation: Automatic with solid state microprocessor.
14. Auxiliary Operations: As specked and include following:
a. Manual door control for power operated doors.
b. Inspection operation, top of car.
c. Independent operation.
d. Emergency operation, including fireman call.
e. Fire and smoke detector operation.
15. Park Landing: Zoned car parking. Last floor landing served with hoistway and car doors closed,
except first floor landing for emergency operation, and fire and smoke detection operation.
16. Hoistway and Car Equipment: As specified and include following:
a. Protection guards for elevator equipment and components.
b. Pit safety stop switch.
c. Car leveling device, automatic 2 -way leveling.
d. Emergency car return.
e. Alarm system.
17. Car Enclosure: As specified and as follows:
a. Galvanized and painted steel elevator side walls.
b. Galvanized and painted steel elevator platform.
18. Hoistway and Car Entrances: As specked and include following:
a. Clear Opening Size: As indicated on Drawings.
b. Function: Manual swing, single leaf.
c. Emergency opening with device at each landing.
19. Additional Requirements: As indicated on Drawings and specified.
END OF SECTION
AESI 27210 TRACTION ELEVATORS 14210 -22
18JAN08
K
K
LODGE AT LIONSHEAD
7
FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
�J
15330-1
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions of the
Contract and Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements,
apply to work of this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Provide new automatic wet and antifreeze fire sprinkler protection in the building as indicated
on the Drawings and as specified herein. Building shall be protected with automatic
sprinklers per code and authority having jurisdiction requirements. Design for Buildings shall
be based on NFPA 13R (2002) "Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems in
Residential Occupancies up to and Including four stories in Height ". New sprinkler piping
shall be connected to existing wet stand pipes or sprinkler system piping as shown on the
contract drawings and zoned on a floor by floor basis. All piping shall be concealed above the
ceiling unless noted on the drawings.
It is the intent of this Specification that the Contractor shall design and provide complete
hydraulic wet automatic sprinkler systems for the areas indicated in these Specifications and
shown on the Contract Drawings. Furnish all design, material, and labor to complete the
Work within the intent of these Specifications and Contract Drawings even though each and
every item necessary is not specifically mentioned or shown. Drawings are schematic, actual
installation may require relocating or adding sprinkler heads and revising pipe sizes to meet
requirements of these specifications.
1.03 EXAMINATION OF SITE
Contractor shall be responsible to visit site prior to bidding project. Failure to examine site
will in no way relieve Contractor from necessity of furnishing materials or performing work
that may be required to complete work in accordance with drawings and specifications
without additional cost to Owner.
0 a
LODGE AT LIONSHEAD 15330-2
R1
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Referenced Standards
The new system shall be designed and installed in accordance with Town of Vail requirements
and the latest revisions of the National Fire Codes specifically NFPA 13R (2002) - "Standard
for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and Including four
stories in Height ". Standard products shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories or
approved by Factory Mutual and bear their label.
Qualifications
The system shall be designed and installed by an experienced firm regularly engaged in the
design and installation of automatic fire protection systems. The Contractor shall have a
minimum of five (5) years experience in the design, installation, and testing of automatic fire
protection systems. Experience shall include projects of similar type, size and complexity.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
The following shall be submitted for review prior to the start of installation: (See Sections
01300 and 01600)
1. Material and equipment information shall include catalog cuts and technical data for
each system component or device. This shall include, but not be limited to piping,
fittings, globe and angle valves, O.S. &Y. valves, butterfly valves, automatic sprinkler
heads, escutcheons, hangers, flow switches, and tamper switches.
2. Shop drawings shall be accurately drawn utilizing AutoCAD to the same scale and
orientation as the building Contract Drawings. System design shall be completely
coordinated with the architectural, structural, mechanical, and electrical features of
the building. The drawings shall show all information required by NFPA 13R, 2002 -
Installation of Sprinkler System, for "Working Drawings" and bear the stamp of a
Colorado Registered Professional Engineer. In all areas with suspended ceilings,
reflected ceiling plans shall be prepared showing the location of sprinklers, lights,
diffusers, grilles, etc.
Approval of submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for correcting any
errors which may exist or for meeting requirements of the specifications and applicable codes.
No partial submittals will be accepted.
A set of approved installation drawings shall be kept at the job site and redlined to indicate
exactly all installation conditions which are different from the approved drawings.
1E
• •
LODGE AT LIONSHEAD 15330-3
1.06 WARRANTIES
The entire new system shall be warranted for a period of one (1) year from the date of "Final
Acceptance" in accordance with the Warranty requirements. (See Section 01700, paragraph
1.04)
1.07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall revise all fire protection documents to
agree with the construction as actually accomplished and stamp "As- Built ". Those drawings
where no change is involved shall be likewise stamped. These "As- Built" drawings shall show
the fire protection system work performed in the areas shown on contract drawings, as it
existed at the completion of the contract work. Submit one (1) set of reproducibles, two (2)
sets ofblueprints, and one (1) set ofAutoCAD files on 3 1/2 inch disk of "As- Built" drawings
to Owner within 30 days after final completion of system testing and prior to final acceptance
by Owner. (See Section 01700, paragraph 1.07)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
Unless otherwise shown on the contract drawings or specified herein, all materials, valves,
and equipment used in the installation of the fire protection system shall be UL listed or FM
approved, and shall be new and of the latest design of the manufacturer.
2.02 SPRINKLER HEADS
The style of automatic sprinkler heads shall be as indicated in these specifications and as
shown on the contract drawings. All sprinklers in all units and corridors shall be residential
type, concealed pendant with white plate (Central LFII, or equal) or white recessed horizontal
sidewall (Central LFII, or equal). All heads located in commercial areas shall be glass bulb
type, quick response, concealed pendant or brass upright (Central GBQR, or equal) as
required. All sprinkler heads shall be ordinary temperature rated unless otherwise required.
2.03 PIPE AND FITTINGS ABOVE GRADE
Fire protection piping and fittings above grade shall conform to the piping and fitting
specifications of NFPA 13R, and local authorities having jurisdiction. Poz -Lok pipe and
fittings shall not be allowed.
Al
0
LODGE AT LIONSHEAD 15330-4
2.04 BUTTERFLY VALVES
Butterfly valves shall be famished with worm gear type indicating operator to assure slow
closing. Valves shall have a completely sealed shaft, integral flange seals, hex drive, and 175
psi working pressure.
2.05 O.S. &Y. VALVES
Outside screw and yoke gate valves shall be of the wedge disc type, shall permit straight line
flow and complete shut -ofl; and shall be so designed that the valves can be packed under
pressure when wide open. Valve shall be iron body, bronze trim, flanged or screwed ends,
with rising stem and 175 psi working pressure.
2.06 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
Reduced pressure backflow preventers shall be provided by type and in location based on
local requirements (FEBCO, or approved equal). Pressure losses shall be included in
hydraulic calculations.
2.07 GLOBE AND ANGLE VALVES
Valves shall be furnished with renewable disc, and shall back seat in the fully opened position
to allow repacking under full pressure without removing the valve from the line. Valve shall
be rated for 175 psi working pressure.
2.08 VALVE SUPERVISORY SWITCHES
All valves one (1) inch or larger, which control water to automatic sprinkler heads, shall be
equipped with supervisory switches having one (1) normally open contact and one (1)
normally closed contact.
2.09 FLOW SWITCHES
All flow switches shall be field adjustable vane type for a working pressure of 175 psi.
2.10 INSPECTOR =S TEST ASSEMBLIES
Test valve assemblies for residential systems shall be compliant with NFPA 13 and/or 13R
requirements.
P1
• •
LODGE AT LIONSHEAD 15330-5
2.11 ALARM FACILITIES
Equipment necessary to accomplish a local water flow signal and a transmitted water flow
signal shall be provided. All required indicating valves shall be electrically supervised. Alarm
devices shall be as manufactured by Potter Electric Signal Company or approved equal.
1. Transmitted Alarm: Flow switch/contact shall be furnished for each building floor
zone. Alarm shall be initiated through local fire alarm panel to remote central station
as required. Wiring of the flow switches, tamper switches, monitor modules and all
final connections shall be provided by this contractor.
2. Local Alarm: Local alarm shall consist of flashing light and horn assembly on the
exterior of the building as directed.
2.12 MISCELLANEOUS
Nameplate Data Information: Nameplates shall be furnished and installed on the main riser
and shall include the following design data: building designation, location of remote area,
design density, area of application, outside hose and system demand (GPM and PSI at base of
riser).
Control Valve Signs: Provide description signs, minimum dimensions seven (7) inches by
nine (9) inches, for every valve in the sprinkler system which controls water to sprinkler
heads. Signs shall be single faced, white letters on a red background, with a space designating
who to notify if valve needs to be closed. Signs shall be fastened to each valve with
lightweight chain.
Miscellaneous Signs: Provide signs for alarm test valves, main drains, auxiliary drains, etc.
having minimum dimensions of two (2) inches by six (6) inches.
Other Items: Splash blocks shall be concrete, 12 inches by 12 inches by 4 inches thick. A
commercially available splash block may be provided as a suitable alternate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
The Contractor shall investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting the work and
shall arrange his work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves, and accessories as maybe
required to meet such conditions. The Contractor shall field verify all dimensions and
conditions governing his work at the building. Materials shall not be fabricated or delivered
® J
LODGE AT LIONSHEAD 15330-6
to the site before the approved shop drawings and equipment submittals have been received Ij
by the Contractor.
3.02 DESIGN
The latest revisions of the following codes, standards, and other items as of the date of the
Contract Documents shall be considered a part of these Specifications, the same as if fully set
forth herein and must be adhered to unless specific deviations are included in these
Specifications.
National Fire Codes - (NFPA Standards) - 2003 Edition
NFPA No. 13R, 2002 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems in
Residential Occupancies up to and Including Four Stories
in Height
NFPA No 14, 2000 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe, Private Hydrant,
and Hose
Town of Vail
The sprinkler system piping shall provide the following hydraulic requirements:
For condominium units, the number of design sprinklers shall include all sprinklers ,
within a compartment to a maximum of four (4) sprinklers. Additional design
sprinklers may be required based on ceiling configuration. The system shall provide
discharge rates in accordance with flow rates indicated in individual residential
sprinkler listings and meet NFPA 13R requirements.
For corridors, the number of design sprinklers shall include all sprinklers to a
maximum of five (5).
The hydraulic calculations shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of NFPA
13R. The Contractor shall calculate the demand point for the system so that it remains 10
percent below the final water supply curve at the connection to the public water system. The
demand point for the systems shall include an allowance for the inside and outside hose
demand of 100 gpm for light hazard and residential occupancies and 250 gpm for ordinary
hazard occupancies. The basis for pipe sizing on the drawings is an assumed water flow
supply with four (4) heads flowing in the building. Pipe sizes for bidding and installation shall
be by hydraulic calculations based on a current water flow test performed by the contractor
using NFPA required most remote areas in building.
0 0
LODGE AT LIONSHEAD 15330-7
3.03 INSTALLATION
The contractor shall perform the work in a professional workman like manner, according to
the best practices of the trade.
Install sprinkler piping as shown on Contract Drawings in a good workmanship manner. All
sprinkler piping must be substantially supported from the building structure and only
approved type hangers shall be used. Sprinkler piping in all areas with suspended ceilings
shall be concealed unless otherwise noted on the contract drawings. All other piping
(exposed areas) shall be installed as high as possible using necessary fittings and auxiliary
drains to maintain maximum height. Any deviations found necessary shall be immediately
brought to the attention of Owner. All piping discharging outside (main drains, inspectors
test pipes, etc.) shall do so on paved surfaces or on splash blocks.
All sprinkler heads shall be in alignment, and parallel to ceiling features, walls, etc. The
Contractor shall provide one (1) spare sprinkler cabinet complete with sprinkler wrench and
12 sprinklers of assorted temperature ratings of the type necessary and in use throughout the
new systems at each riser. The Contractor shall be responsible for the removal and
replacement of ceilings, providing ceiling access panels, cutting, patching and restoration of
finishes as necessary (Bids excluding this will not be considered).
Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be
closely coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors.
The Contractor shall clear all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of the fire alarm
equipment after completion of the installation.
Painting: All exposed piping in finished areas shall be painted to match the existing finish in
color and texture. All exposed piping in unfinished areas shall be painted red. Provide
necessary cleaning and prime painting of pipe and conduit (Bids excluding this will not be
considered).
3.04 FIRE PENETRATION SEALS
All new piping penetrations through fire rated floors and walls shall be sealed with fire
resistant sealant to prevent the spread of smoke, fire, toxic gas, and water through the
penetration before, during or after a fire. The fire rating of the penetration seal shall be at
least that required of the floor or wall into which it is installed. Chrome- plated escutcheons
shall be provided where exposed piping passes through finished floors, walls, partitions, and
ceilings. Secure plates to pipe with set screws or spring clips.
17
6
LODGE AT LIONSHEAD 15330-8
R-1
3.05 TESTING
All new fire protection piping shall be acceptance tested by the Contractor. Tests shall consist
of hydrostatic and operational testing and shall be performed in strict accordance with the
requirements of NFPA 13. A test pressure of 200 psi shall be held for a continuous period of
two (2) hours with no drop in pressure. The complete system (all associated piping and
alarms), shall be tested and accepted as a complete unit, with data recorded on an approved
"Contractor's Material and Test Certificate ". System pressure tests shall be against a blank
test flange and not against a valve seat.
The completed fire protection system shall be fully tested with the fire alarm Contractor.
Tests shall be performed in strict accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72. Contractor
shall supply all necessary personnel and all required auxiliary equipment for the test.
The Contractor shall perform a 100% pretest of the entire system. Contractor shall schedule
a final inspection and test with Owner, Engineer, and Town of Vail. All deficiencies shall be
corrected prior to final test.
All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Owner, Engineer, and the Town of Vail and
to their satisfaction. Any system failing to meet the specified test requirements shall be
corrected and re- tested at no additional cost, until the test requirements are met. Upon j
completion of a successful test, the Contractor shall so certify in writing.
All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Owner's representative and the Vail Fire
Department. Any system failing to meet the specified test requirements shall be corrected and
retested at no additional cost, until the test requirements are met. Upon completion of a
successful test, the Contractor shall so certify in writing.
The Contractor shall notify Owner upon completion of the installation of all fire sprinkler and
fire alarm work. Contractor shall schedule an inspection of the installed system with Owner
and fire department. This inspection and any changes required by this or any inspection shall
be made prior to the above testing.
3.06 FINAL ACCEPTANCE AND FOLLOW -UP
Final acceptance will be granted after a successful test has been accomplished.
Contractor shall provide any special tools required for maintenance and testing.
A minimum of 10 working days prior to testing, the contractor shall schedule one (1) training
session (See Section 01700, 1.08). The training session, scheduled prior to testing, shall be
F
•
LODGE AT LIONSHEAD
15330-9
given to personnel responsible for operations and maintenance. There shall be no charge for
this training.
The training session shall be no less than two (2) hours and presented on -site by a qualified
representative of the contractor and equipment manufacturer. The training shall include but
not be limited to the following areas of instruction:
1. Training Session
2. System layout, devices, zoning, etc.
3. Trouble shooting.
4. Field maintenance i.e. remove /replacement of devices, cleaning, etc.
5. Testing and reports.
6. Operation and maintenance manual.
3.07 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONAL INSTRUCTIONS
System description, system theory of operation, and system final inspection and acceptance
documents of the completed system ( "As- Built ") shall be submitted in a bound book (four
sets) to Owner. Any other provision of this contract notwithstanding, such submission shall
be done prior to Notice of Acceptance and within 30 days after completion of the system
installation. The maintenance manuals and instructions shall include a brief description ofthe
type of systems provided, routine -type maintenance work defined by step -by -step instructions
that should be performed to ensure long life and proper operation, and the recommended
frequency of performance. The instructions shall also include possible trouble spots with
diagnosis and correction of each. The theory of operation brochures shall describe the
function of each component or subassembly in block - diagram type presentation to a degree
that a craftsman will understand the system well enough to operate and maintain it. Each
book shall include one (1) set of "As- Built" drawings. (See Section 01700, paragraph 1.06)
3.08 PROTECTION
Protect all apparatus, fixtures, materials, equipment, interior finishes, Owner's property,
furnishings, and installations so as to prevent damage as a result of new work. The
Contractor shall replace at his own expense any item, which is marred, defaced, broken, or
damaged in any way, prior to the date of "Final Acceptance."
END OF SECTION - 15330
•
13
F7
IE
LANDMARK 9
n
SECTION 16721— FIRE ALARM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
• Vail, Colorado
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions ofthe
Contract and Supplementary General Conditions and General Requirements, apply to this
work.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Furnish and install complete fire alarm and detection system with voice /evacuation to be
wired, connected, and left in first -class operating condition for areas shown on Contract
Drawings. Include sufficient smoke detectors, manual pull stations, speaker /strobes,
wiring, conduit, electrical boxes, terminations, and all other necessary material for a
complete operating system.
B. The system shall include, but not be limited to the following elements:
1. Addressable fire alarm control panel. (Existing)
2. Power supplies.
3. Equipment enclosures.
4. Intelligent addressable manual pull stations, analog smoke detectors, alarm
monitoring modules, interfacing modules, and supervised control modules.
5. Voice/Evacuation
6. Audible and visual evacuation signals.
7. Software, management utilities and firmware as required to provide a complete
functioning interactive system.
8. Wiring and raceway.
9. Installation, testing, certification and education labor.
C. It is the intent of this specification that the Contractor shall provide a complete fire alarm
and detection system with voice /evacuation for the areas indicated in these Specifications
and shown on the Contract Drawings. Furnish all design, material, and labor to complete
the work within the intent of these Specifications and Contract Drawings even though
each and every item necessary is not specifically mentioned or shown. Drawings are
schematic, actual installation may require relocating or adding devices to meet
requirements of these Specifications. Existing system shall remain in service until
switched over to new system. All existing equipment, wiring and back boxes not reused
shall be removed.
16721-1
LANDMARK
Vail, Colorado
1.3 EXAMINATION OF SITE
A. Contractor shall be responsible to visit site prior to bidding project. Failure to examine
site will in no way relieve Contractor from necessity of furnishing materials or performing
work that may be required to complete work in accordance with drawings and
specifications without additional cost to Owner.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards
1. The new system shall be designed and installed in accordance with the Vail Fire
Department requirements and the latest edition of the National Fire Codes. Each
and all items of the fire alarm system shall be UL listed or FM approved as a
product of a single system manufacturer under the appropriate category and shall
bear their label.
B. Qualifications
1. The system shall be designed and installed by an experienced factory authorized
firm regularly engaged in the installation of automatic fire alarm systems. The
Contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the design, a„
installation, and testing of automatic fire alarm systems. A Fire Protection
Engineer or NICET III or IV Designer shall design the automatic fire alarm
system. The equipment manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the design and
manufacture of fire alarm systems equipment on an on -going basis. Experience
shall include projects of similar type, size, and complexity.
2. There shall exist, within the State of Colorado, an established sales and service
agency authorized by the system manufacturer which stocks a full complement of
parts and offers 24 hour service on all equipment to be furnished. The agency
shall supply parts without delay and at reasonable cost.
3. The fire alarm system equipment controls and all other major system components
shall be designed, manufactured and UL listed as an integrated system and be
product of one manufacturer.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. The following shall be submitted for review prior to the start of installation:
1. Submittal data shall include catalog data for each item of equipment and installation
drawings prepared expressly for this project.
F
16721-2
LANDMARK
• Vail, Colorado
2. Shop drawings shall be accurately drawn utilizing AutoCAD to the same scale and
orientation as the building Contract Drawings and bear the stamp of a Colorado
Registered Professional Engineer. Installation drawings shall include at least the
following:
a.
Floor plans of the entire project drawn to a scale as shown on Contract
Drawings (Fire alarm drawings are available on AutoCAD disks). Floor plans
shall indicate all control panels, annunciators, devices, terminal boxes and all
other equipment locations; actual anticipated conduit routings; conductor
types, quantities, color code and purpose for each conduit run; locations and
sizes of all pull boxes and junction boxes; and any other information necessary
for the installation and maintenance of the system.
b.
Point to point wiring diagram
c.
Device wiring diagrams
d.
Terminal identification at control panel
e.
End of line device: type, rating and location
f.
One -line diagram
g.
Sequence of operation
h.
Battery calculations
i.
List of specific device model numbers
j.
The number of each type of device
k.
Information indicating the specific zones
1.
Circuit diagrams
m.
Wiring type, size, and number
n.
Source of AC Power circuits
o. Emergency lighting at the fire alarm control panel
p. Information indicating monitoring method and monitoring company
q. Legend of all symbols and abbreviations used on the drawings
r. Electrical schematics, construction details, and component specifications for
all equipment
s. Device connection details, including conductor color codes and pigtail
arrangements
B. Written approval of the Engineer of Record and the Town of Vail Fire Department shall
be obtained before purchasing or installing any equipment.
C. Approval of submittals will not relieve the Contractor ofthe responsibility for correcting
any errors which may exist or for meeting requirements of the specifications and
applicable codes. No partial submittals will be accepted.
D. A set of approved installation drawings shall be kept at the job site and redlined to
indicate exactly all installation conditions which are different from the approved drawings.
0 16721-3
Vail, Colorado
1.6 WARRANTIES
A. The entire new system shall be warranted for a period of one (1) year from the date of
Notice of Acceptance in accordance with the Warranty requirements. A UL Certificate of
Installation shall be provided.
1.7 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall revise all fire alarm and detection
documents to agree with the construction as actually accomplished and stamp "As- Built ".
Those drawings where no change is involved shall be likewise stamped. These "As- Built"
drawings shall show the fire alarm system work performed in the areas shown on Contract
Drawings, as it existed at the completion of the contract work. As -Built Contract
Drawings shall also indicate actual wire color codes, riser conduit sizes and wire counts,
and wire counts to each floor. Submit one (1) set of reproducibles, two (2) sets of
blueprints, and one (1) set of AutoCAD files on CD of "As- Built" drawings to Owner
within 30 days after final completion of system installation and prior to Notice of
Acceptance by Owner.
1.8 SYSTEM FUNCTION
A. The system shall be a complete electrically supervised protected premises type fire
detection and evacuation system with microprocessor based operating system. The
system shall be provided with password protection. Passwords and functions shall be
field programmable.
B. The fire alarm panel shall have the capacity to supervise, monitor, record activity and
annunciate addresses in addition to the supervision and distribution of audible, visual
communications and annunciation. The control panel shall be UL fisted as a test
instrument for the measurement and logging of the sensitivity of intelligent analog smoke
detectors connected to the control panel to comply with the sensitivity logging
requirements of NFPA 72. Trouble reports shall annunciate the specific location of the
smoke detector requiring service. All analog smoke detectors installed in the system shall
include this feature.
C. The system shall support intelligent analog smoke detection, intelligent manual station,
conventional water flow, and sprinkler supervisory, and status monitoring devices.
Intelligent analog smoke detectors shall include a selectable alarm verification capability.
This feature shall provide automatic verification of smoke detector alarms as described by
NFPA 72. Fire alarm, supervisory, trouble, and status shall each be treated as a separate
level of alarm, each with its own level of priority, alarm indicators and acknowledgement
switches.
E
16721-4
LANDMARK 0
A Vail, Colorado
40' D. The system shall be programmable in the field via laptop computer. All programmed
information shall be stored in nonvolatile memory after loading into the control panel. No
special programming terminal or prom burning shall be required and the system shall
continue in service during reprogramming. System program shall be stored on a floppy
disk and all programming shall be multi -level password protected.
E. In the event of processor failure or loss of system communications, the system shall
recognize any alarm or trouble condition during degrade mode operation and shall give a
visual indication. Detector operation in the degrade mode shall continue at the alarm
threshold previously programmed.
F. All field test activity shall be logged to the system historical memory. It shall be possible
to download historical memory to a data base program prior to, and subsequent to the
walk test in order to establish a continuous system history. Historical memory shall
accommodate alarm events to prevent overflow during testing.
1.9 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. The system alarm operation subsequent to the alarm activation of any monitored device
shall be in accordance with NFPA Standards and Vail Fire Department Requirements.
The system operation shall be such that the alarm operation of any initiating device shall
not prevent the subsequent alarm operation of any other initiating device due to wiring or
power limitations.
B. Activation of any fire alarm initiating device in a public area shall cause the following
actions and indications at the local control panel:
1. Display at the fire alarm control panel on an alphanumeric LCD display, a custom
message describing the device originating the alarm condition.
2. Automatically send alarm signal to the Central Station.
3. Activate local alarm audible and visual signals at the control panel.
4. Initiate Voice/Evacuation system and recorded message. Activate all sounder
bases in residential units throughout the building. The visual signals shall operate
in a similar pattern. Sprinkler system water flow alarm shall not be silenceable
while the sprinkler system is flowing at a rate of flow equal to at least a single
head. Visual signals shall be programmable to flash until system reset as required.
5. Elevator lobby detector activation shall cause recall of the elevators to the first
floor and the lockout of controls. In the event of initiation of the first floor
elevator lobby detector, the elevator shall be recalled to the alternate floor. Recall
signal shall activate all required hoist way vents and mechanical ventilation fans.
6. Record within system history memory, the occurrence of the event, the time and
date of occurrence and the device initiating the event. In addition, all operator
actions shall be logged to system history with time and date.
677
16721-5
Vail, Colorado
C. Activation of any fire alarm initiating device in a residential room or residential unit shall
cause the following actions and indications at the control panel.
1. Display at the fire alarm control panel and remote annunciator alphanumeric LCD
displays a custom message describing the device originating the alarm condition.
2. Activate local alarm audible and visual signals at the control panel.
3. Activate all sounder bases within the unit of alarm. Audible signals shall be
temporal tone and silenceable from the fire alarm control panel by an alarm silence
switch.
4. Record within system history memory, the occurrence of the event, the time and
date of occurrence and the device initiating the event. In addition, all operator
actions shall be logged to system history with time and date.
D. Activation of any supervisory circuit, i.e.; supervised valve closure; trouble shall cause the
following actions and indications:
1. Display at the fire alarm control panel on an alphanumeric LCD display, a custom
message describing the device originating the supervisory condition.
2. Automatically send supervisory signal to the Central Station.
3. Activate supervisory audible and visual signals at the control panel. Audible
signals shall be silenceable from the fire alarm control panel by an alarm
acknowledge switch.
4. Record within system history, the occurrence of the event, the time of occurrence, Wj
and the device initiating the event.
E. Receipt of a trouble report, i.e.; primary power loss, open or grounded initiating or
signaling circuit wiring, open, grounded or shorted indication system wiring, device
communication failure, battery disconnect at the fire alarm control panel shall cause the
following actions and indications:
1. Display at the fire alarm control panel on an alphanumeric LCD display, a custom
message describing the device originating the trouble condition.
2. Automatically send trouble signal to the Central Station.
3. Activate trouble audible and visual signals at the control panel. Audible signals
shall be silenceable from the fire alarm control panel by a trouble acknowledge
switch. Trouble conditions which have been restored to normal shall be
automatically removed from the trouble display queue and not require operator
intervention. This feature shall be software selectable and shall not preclude the
logging of trouble events to the historical file.
4. Record within system history, the occurrence of the event, the time of occurrence
and the device initiating the event.
16721-6
LANDMARK 0 0 Vail, Colorado
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All equipment, wiring and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current
model. The materials, appliances, equipment, wiring and devices shall be tested and
listed by a nationally recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protective
signaling system, meeting the National Fire Alarm Code.
B. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with
manufacturers' recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for
all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning
system installation.
C. All equipment and devices shall be installed with back or junction boxes and attached
to structural portion of walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held firmly in
place. Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load.
2.2 CONDUIT AND WIRE
A. Conduit shall be in accordance with The National Electrical Code (NEC), local and
state requirements. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional
area where three (3) or more cables are contained within a single conduit. Conduit
shall be 3/4 inch minimum.
B. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article
760) and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and
size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer,
but not less than 18 AWG (1.02 mm) for Initiating Device Circuits and Signaling Line
Circuits, and 14 AWG (1.63 mm) for Notification Appliance Circuits. All wire and
cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use with a
protective signaling system. Wire and cable not installed in conduit shall have a fire
resistance rating suitable for the installation as indicated in NFPA 70 (e.g., FPLP).
Wiring used for the multiplex communication circuit (SLC) shall be solid and
unshielded and support a minimum wiring distance of 12,500 feet. The design of the
system shall permit use of IDC and NAC wiring in the same conduit with the SLC
communication circuit.
2.3 FIRE ALARM PANEL
A. The main FACP shall contain a microprocessor based Central Processing Unit (CPU)
and power supply in a single board design. The CPU shall communicate with and
control the following types of equipment used to make up the system: intelligent
addressable smoke and thermal (heat) detectors, addressable manual pull stations,
16721-7
LANDMARK
Vail, Colorado
addressable modules, annunciators, status panels and other system controlled devices.
The fire alarm control panel shall have the capacity to supervise, monitor, record
activity and annunciate addresses in addition to the supervision and distribution of
audible, visual communications and annunciation. All visual devices shall be
synchronized as required by code.
B. The FACP shall provide the following features:
1. Drift compensation to extend detector accuracy over life. Drift compensation
shall also include a smoothing feature, allowing transient noise signals to be
filtered out.
2. Detector sensitivity test, meeting requirements of NFPA 72.
3. Maintenance alert, to warn of excessive smoke detector dirt or dust
accumulation.
4. The ability to display or print system reports.
5. Rapid manual station reporting (less than 3 seconds) and shall meet NFPA 72
Chapter 1 requirements for activation of notification circuits within 10
seconds of initiating device activation.
C. The system shall support 80 character display option. The display shall include an 80-
character backlit alphanumeric Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) and a full PC style
QWERTY keypad. The 80- character display shall include the following operator
control switches: ACKNOWLEDGE, ALARM SILENCE, ALARM ACTIVATE
(drill), SYSTEM RESET, and LAMP TEST. The 80- character display shall provide
8 Light - Emitting- Diodes (LEDs) that indicate the status of the following system
parameters: AC POWER, FIRE ALARM, PREALARM WARNING,
SUPERVISORY SIGNAL, SYSTEM TROUBLE, and ALARM SILENCED.
D. CPU shall receive analog information from all intelligent detectors to be processed to
determine whether normal, alarm, or trouble conditions exist for each detector.
E. The control panel shall be housed in a UL -listed cabinet suitable for surface or semi -
flush mounting. The cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rust -
resistant prime coat, and manufacturer's standard finish. The door shall provide a key
lock and shall include a glass or other transparent opening for viewing of all
indicators. For convenience, the door may be site configured for either right or left
hand hinging.
F. The FACP shall provide smoke detector point disable, system status reports,
automatic detector maintenance alert, and pre -alarm function.
G. Voice/Evacuation system shall be provided.
a
16721-8
LANDMARK 0 0 Vail, Colorado
2.4 AMPLIFIERS, PREAMPLIFIERS, TONE GENERATORS
A. General: Any amplifiers, preamplifiers, tone generators, digitalized voice drives and all
other hardware necessary for a complete, operational voice /alarm signaling service
conforming to NFPA 72 shall be housed in a remote fire alarm control unit, terminal
cabinet, or in the fire alarm control panel. The system shall automatically operate and
control all building fire alarm speakers except those installed in the stairs and within
elevator cabs. The speakers in the stairs and elevator cabs shall operate only when the
microphone is used to deliver live messages and the appropriate zone selector
switches have been activated. Amplifiers shall be provided for a two - channel system
as a minimum; one to broadcast an automated message and the other for live manual
paging.
B. Construction: All amplifiers shall utilize computer grade solid state components and
shall be provided with output protection devices sufficient to protect the amplifier
against any transient up to ten (10) times the highest rated voltage in the system.
C. Inputs: Each system shall be equipped with separate inputs from the tone generator,
digitalized voice driver and panel mounted microphone. Microphone inputs shall be
of the low impedance, balanced line type. Both microphone and tone generator input
shall be operational on any amplifier.
D. Tone Generator: The tone generator shall be of the modular, plug -in type with
securely attached labels to identify the component as a tone generator and to identify
the specific tone it produces. The tone generator shall produce a three -pulse temporal
tone and be constantly repeated until interrupted by either the digitalized voice
message, the microphone input or the alarm silence mode as specified. The tone
generator shall be single channel with an automatic backup generator per channel such
that failure of the primary tone generator causes the backup generator to
automatically take over the functions of the failed unit and also causes transfer of the
common trouble relay.
E. Protection Circuits: Each amplifier shall be constantly supervised for any condition
which could render the amplifier inoperable at its maximum output. Failure of any
component shall cause automatic transfer to a designated backup amplifier,
illumination of a visual "amplifier trouble" indicator on the control panel, appropriate
logging of the condition on the system printer and other actions for trouble conditions
as specified. This requires at least one backup amplifier per system.
2.5 INTELLIGENT PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTOR
A. The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light- scattering) principal to measure smoke
density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel
le
16721-9
LANDMARK
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
Vail, Colorado
representing the analog level of smoke density. It shall connect via two wires to the
fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit.
INTELLIGENT PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTOR WITH SOUNDER BASES
A. The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light- scattering) principal to measure smoke
density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel
representing the analog level of smoke density. It shall connect via two wires to the
fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit and two wires to the 24 volt power
source. These detectors shall be used in the units. When activated they shall send a
signal to the FRCP, this signal IS NOT sent to the central station (detectors act like
single station devices). The device shall utilize reverse polarity to sound all of the
detectors within a unit upon activation.
INTELLIGENT THERMAL DETECTORS
A. Thermal detectors shall be intelligent addressable devices rated at 135 degrees
Fahrenheit (58 degrees Celsius) and have a rate -of -rise element rated at 15 degrees F
(9.4 degrees C) per minute. They shall connect via two wires to the fire alarm control
panel signaling line circuit.
B. Heat detectors shall be provided and installed within their listing requirements.
ADDRESSABLE MANUAL PULL STATIONS
A. Addressable manual pull stations shall, on command from the control panel, send data
to the panel representing the state of the manual switch and the addressable
communication module status. They shall use a key operated test -reset lock, and shall
be designed so that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to
normal use except by the use of a key. Addressability may be accomplished by use of
mini dry contact input modules.
SPEAKER /STROBE
A. Provide surface mounted multi - candela combination speaker /strobe appliances listed
under UL Standard 1971 and UL Standard 464. All strobes shall incorporate circuitry
for synchronized strobe flash. The strobe intensity shall have a minimum of four field
selectable settings and shall be rated per UL Standard 1971 for: 30, 75 or 110
candela, with a flash rate of one flash per second minimum across the listed voltage
range. The strobe flash output shall be 15/75 candela minimum for wall- mounted
locations based on the UL 1971 test. The strobes shall not drift out of
synchronization at any time during operation. The strobe shall incorporate a Xenon
flash tube. The appliance shall also be designed so that the audible signal may be
silenced while maintaining strobe activation. Provide fire alarm speakers conforming
P]
16721-10
LANDMARK •
® Vail, Colorado
to UL 464 having a minimum of three (3) tap settings and separate terminations for
each "in" and "out" connection. At a minimum, tap settings shall include taps of 1/4,
1/2 and 1 watt. Speakers shall have an output rating of 84 dBA at 3 meters as
determined by the reverberant room test; data on peak output as determined in an
anechoic chamber is not suitable.
B. To ensure audible signals are clearly heard, the sound level shall be at least 70 dBA
throughout the general building areas, corridors and units measured 5 feet above the
floor. The sound level in other areas shall be at least 15 dBA above the average
sound level or 5 dBA above any noise source lasting 60 seconds or longer. Sound
level measurements shall be taken with room doors closed. Contractor shall include
additional speakers for required coverage to quantities of fire alarm speakers shown
on the contract drawings for cost estimating purposes only. Additional speakers shall
be provided at no additional expense to the owner if the sound levels noted above are
not achieved during the final acceptance testing.
2.10 REMOTE POWER SUPPLIES
A. Remote power supplies shall offer up to 6.0 amps (maximum 3.0 amps per output
circuit) of regulated 24 volt power. It shall provide four (4) power - limited
notification outputs, two (2) Class A or four (4) Class B. It shall include an integral
charger designed to charge 7.0 amp hour batteries and to support 24 hour standby
with ten (10) minutes of alarm operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. The Contractor shall investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting the work
and shall arrange his work accordingly, providing such fittings, and accessories as may
be required to meet such conditions. The Contractor shall field verify all dimensions
and conditions governing his work at the building. Materials shall not be fabricated or
delivered to the site before the approved shop drawings and equipment submittals
have been received by the Contractor from the Engineer and the Vail Fire
Department.
3.2 DESIGN
A. The latest editions ofthe following codes, standards, and other items as of the date of
the Contract Documents shall be considered a part of these Specifications, the same as
if fully set forth herein and must be adhered to unless specific deviations are included
in these Specifications.
Al
16721-11
1XIMI - 110T/_\
Vail, Colorado
1. National Fire Codes - (NFPA Standards) - 2006 Edition
2. NFPA No. 70, 2002 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
3. NFPA No. 72, 2002 - National Fire Alarm Code
4. IBC, 2003 — International Building Code
5. IFC, 2003 — International Fire Code
6.. Vail Fire Department Requirements
M
Supervision -- The system shall contain Style Y supervised initiating circuits. All
trouble signals shall be audibly and visually indicated at the fire alarm control panel.
Electrical supervision shall be provided on the following:
1. Open signal initiating circuit.
2. Open or shorted alarm output circuit wiring.
3. Loss of commercial AC power.
4. Failure of power supply or load fuse.
5. Disconnected emergency batteries.
6. Open or short on releasing circuit.
3.3
D. Power Requirements -- Provide 120 VAC power to the new fire alarm control panel
via dedicated breaker disconnect circuit from the emergency power service panel.
The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire
system upon loss of normal 120 VAC power in a normal supervisory mode for a
period of twenty -four (24) hours with ten (10) minutes of alarm operation at the end
of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries and to
the building generator as required upon power failure.
E. Additional remote power supplies shall be provided as necessary.
F. All external circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be
individually fused at the control panel.
INSTALLATION
A. The Contractor shall perform the work in a professional workmanlike manner,
according to the best practices of the trade.
B. Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and specifications, all
applicable codes and the manufacturer's recommendations. All new wiring shall be
installed in strict compliance with all the provisions of NEC Article 760 A and C,
Power Limited Fire Protective Signaling Circuits or if required may be reclassified as
non -power limited and wired in accordance with NEC Article 760 A and B. Upon
completion, the Contractor shall so certify in writing to Owner.
PE
F]
16721-12
LANDMARK • 0 Vail, Colorado
C. All fire alarm junction boxes must be clearly marked for easy identification. Wiring
may be approved plenum rated cable where allowed. All devices shall have a back
(junction) box attached securely to wall or ceiling structure. All conduits, plenum
rated cable, mounting boxes, junction boxes and panels shall be securely hung and
fastened with appropriate fittings to insure positive grounding throughout the system.
All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and labeled "fire alarm ". Wiring color code
and type shall be maintained throughout the installation.
D. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall
be closely coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors.
E. No wiring other than that directly associated with fire alarm detection, alarm or
auxiliary functions shall be permitted in fire alarm conduits. Wiring splices are to be
avoided to the extent possible, and if needed they must be only at junction boxes and
shall be crimp connected. Transposing or changing color coding of wires shall not be
permitted. Wire -nut type connections are not acceptable. All conductors shall be
labeled on each end with "E -Z" markers or equivalent. Identification markings shall
be indicated by the zone or circuit identification. Conductors in cabinets and terminal
boxes shall be carefully formed and harnessed so that each drops off directly opposite
to its terminal. Only dry talcum shall be used for pulling compound, no soap or liquid
pulling agents will be allowed. All new wiring shall be checked, meggered, and tested
to insure that there are no grounds, opens, or shorts.
F. The Contractor shall clear all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside ofthe fire
alarm equipment after completion of the installation.
3.4 PENETRATION SEALS
A. All new wire and conduit penetrations through fire rated floors and walls shall be
sealed with U.L. listed fire barrier systems to prevent the spread of smoke, fire, toxic
gas, and water through the penetration either before during, or after a fire. The fire
rating of the penetration seal shall be at least that of the floor or wall into which it is
installed. Materials provided around conduits, cables, etc. shall accommodate for
movement.
3.5 TESTING
A. The completed fire alarm system shall be fully tested by the Contractor. Tests shall be
performed in strict accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72. Contractor shall
supply all necessary personnel and all required auxiliary equipment for the test.
B. Control Panel shall be tested for complete functions including all transmitted alarms in
strict accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72 and the Vail Fire Department.
Each fire alarm device shall be tested to assure it actuates, it sends a signal to control
1W
16721 -13
LANDMARK
Vail, Colorado
panel, and the control panel responds correctly. Each fire sprinkler system flow
switch and tamper switch shall be tested to assure they activate, they send a signal to
the control panel, and the control panel responds correctly. All tests shall be
performed with system primary power and system secondary power.
C. The Contractor shall perform a 100% pretest of the entire system. Contractor shall
schedule a final inspection and test with the Owner and the Vail Fire Department. All
deficiencies shall be corrected prior to final test.
D. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Owner and the Vail Fire
Department and to their satisfaction. Any system failing to meet the specified test
requirements shall be corrected and re- tested at no additional cost, until the test
requirements are met. Upon completion of a successful test, the Contractor shall so
certify in writing.
E. The Contractor shall notify Owner upon completion of the installation of all fire
sprinkler work. Contractor shall schedule an inspection of the installed system with
Owner and fire department. This inspection and any changes required by this or any
inspection shall be made prior to the above testing.
3.6 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONAL INSTRUCTIONS
A. System description, system theory of operation, and system final inspection and
acceptance documents of the completed system ( "As- Built "), specific to this project,
shall be submitted in a bound book four (4) sets to Owner. Any other provision of
this contract notwithstanding, such submission shall be done prior to Notice of
Acceptance and within 30 days after completion of the system installation. The
maintenance manuals and instructions shall include a brief description of the type of
system provided, routine -type maintenance work defined by step -by -step instructions
that should be performed to ensure long fife and proper operation, and the
recommended frequency of performance. The instructions shall also include possible
trouble spots with diagnosis and correction of each. The theory of operation
brochures shall describe the function of each component or subassembly in block -
diagram type presentation to a degree that a craftsman will understand the system well
enough to operate and maintain it. Each book shall include one (1) set of "As- Built"
drawings.
3.7 FINAL ACCEPTANCE AND FOLLOW -UP
A. Notice of Final Acceptance will be granted after all contract requirements have been
accomplished.
B. Contractor shall provide any special tools required for maintenance and testing.
RI
16721-14
LANDMARK • . Vail, Colorado
C. Equipment Demonstrations: Upon completion of the work and prior to testing,
schedule a time with the Owner, and instruct the Owner's representative(s) on the
proper operation and maintenance of the equipment. As a minimum presenting
participants shall include the Contractor, appropriate subcontractor and equipment
manufacturer's representatives. The Contractor's representatives shall have a
thorough knowledge of the particular installation and manufacturer's representative
shall have a thorough understanding of the particular equipment.
D. The training session shall be no less than one (1), four (4) hour meeting and presented
on -site by a qualified representative of the system manufacturer. The training shall
include but not be limited to the following areas of instruction:
E. Training Session
1. System layout, devices, zoning, etc.
2. Trouble shooting
3. Field maintenance i.e. remove /replacement of devices, cleaning, etc.
4. Testing and reports
5. Maintenance and Operational Instructions
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect all apparatus, fixtures, materials, equipment, interior finishes, Owner's
property, furnishings and installations so as to prevent damage as a result of new
work. The Contractor shall replace at his own expense any item, which is marred,
defaced, broken, or damaged in any way, prior to the date of "Notice of Final"
Acceptance.
END OF SECTION 16721
0
16721-15
LM
IE
E
0
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
•
SECTION 220500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4. Sleeves.
5. Escutcheons.
6. Grout.
7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
8. Concrete bases.
9. Supports and anchorages.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than plumbing and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe
chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces,
crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and plumbing equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and
physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples
include installations within unheated shelters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
0
10
1.4
Welding certificates.
Plumbing Fixtures to the architect.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code — Steel."
220CT07 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 -1
AEC 27815
Aeft
Mr A
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, Code for Pressure Piping. 11
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved
and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics
may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical
services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or
efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME 131.20.1 for factory- threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe - Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free, 1/8 -inch maximum
thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
C. Pipe - Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloys. Include water flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12.
2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder joint,
plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory- fabricated, union assembly, for 250 -psig minimum working pressure at
180 deg F.
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory fabricated, companion flange assembly, for 150- or 300 -psig minimum
working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
220CT07 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 -2
AEC 27815
0 •
!7
•
11
E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
threaded ends; and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain,
threaded, or grooved ends; and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between
pipe and sleeve.
B. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number
required for pipe material and size of pipe.
C. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion - resistant coating of length required to
secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.5 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: 0.0239 -inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and
integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast -iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
2.6 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit
around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.
B. One - Piece, Deep- Pattern Type: Deep - drawn, box - shaped brass with polished chrome - plated finish.
C. One -Piece, Cast -Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome - plated.
D. Split- Casting, Cast -Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome - plated.
22OCT07 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
AEC 27815
220500 -3
Ln
2.7 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic- cement c
1. Characteristics: Post - hardening, volume- adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, i
and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping
systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and
service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated,
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum -board partitions, and
concrete floor and roof slabs.
N. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular dear space between pipe and sleeve for
installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast -iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
220CT07 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 -4
AEC 27815
•
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for
pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals
and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates
that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
O. Underground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast -iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe
penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular dear
space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for
pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals
and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates
that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
P. Fire - Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe
penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
:4
3.2
A.
B.
C.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing -in
requirements.
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying
piping systems.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water - flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end.
Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead -free
solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter,
using copper- phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME 131.20.1. Cut threads
full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join
pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading
is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding
operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application.
Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
4 0
220CT07 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 -5
AEC 27815
VIZI
LZA
3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS
KILN
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NIPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to
each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials
of dissimilar metals.
3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not
indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.5 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written
instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy - coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base,
and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000 -psi, 28 -day compressive - strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in
Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to
support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.
22OCT07 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 -6
AEC 27815
•
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.7 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor plumbing
materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will
receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting
wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.8 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment
base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION 220500
11
220CT07 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
AEC 27815
220500 -7
F - AMN
05
E
IE
LF
E
0
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 220513
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements for single -phase and polyphase, general - purpose, horizontal,
small and medium, pump motors for use on ac power systems up to120 V and installed at equipment
manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in
plumbing equipment schedules or Sections.
B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 8,150 feet above sea
level.
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at
designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and
without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C. Service Factor: 1.15.
220CT07 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING 220513 -1
AEC 27815
0
D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E. Rotor: Random - wound, squirrel cage.
F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
H. Insulation: Class F.
I. Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
J. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame
sizes smaller than 324T.
2.4 SINGLE -PHASE MOTORS
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of
specific motor application:
1. Permanent -split capacitor.
2. Split phase.
3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Multispeed Motors: Variable- torque, permanent- split- capacitor type.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded -pole type.
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when
winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation.
Thermal- protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)
END OF SECTION 220513
P]
IE
J
220CT07 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING 220513 -2
AEC 27815
e
e
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 220516
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal - bellows expansion joints.
2. Pipe bends and loops.
3. Alignment guides and anchors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Delegated- Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems and for
selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and bends.
2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions and methods
of assembly and attachment to building structure.
3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building structure.
4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end
connections, and location for each expansion joint.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Product certificates.
E. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. Steel Shapes and Plates: AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. Welding to Piping: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Metal - Bellows Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1120, circular- corrugated - bellows type with external tie
rods.
220CT07 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING 220516 -1
AEC 27815
� 4
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
2. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Adsco Manufacturing, LLC.
b. Expansion Joint Systems, Inc.
C. Flex -Hose Co., Inc.
d. Flexicraft Industries.
e. Flex - Pression, Ltd.
f. Metraflex, Inc.
3. Metal - Bellows Expansion Joints for Copper Piping: Single- or multiple -ply phosphor- bronze
bellows, copper pipe end connections, and brass shrouds.
4. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Configuration: Single- or double - bellows type, unless otherwise indicated.
6. End Connections: Flanged or weld.
2.2 ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A. Description: Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two- section outer cylinder and base for alignment
of piping and two- section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
2. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Adsco Manufacturing, LLC.
b. Flex -Hose Co., Inc.
C. Flexicraft Industries.
d. Metraflex, Inc.
e.
2.3 MATERIALS FOR ANCHORS
A. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.
C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge -type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened
portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.
1. Stud: Threaded, zinc - coated carbon steel.
2. Expansion Plug: Zinc - coated steel.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc - coated steel.
E. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3000 psi minimum. Comply with requirements in Division 03
Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.
F. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and - packaged, dry, hydraulic - cement, nonshrink, nonmetallic
grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. V)
220CT07 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING 220516 -2
AEC 27815
C ,
J
0
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXPANSION -JOINT INSTALLATION
A. Install manufactured, nonmetallic expansion joints according to FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non -
Metallic Expansion Joints and Flexible Pipe Connectors."
B. Install expansion joints of sizes matching size of piping in which they are installed.
C. Install alignment guides to allow expansion and to avoid end - loading and torsional stress.
3.2
PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe bends and loops cold- sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb
tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.
B. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.
1. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
3.4
A.
B.
3.5
A.
SWING CONNECTIONS
Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings, including tee in main.
Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings, including tee
in riser.
Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings, including tee
in main.
ALIGNMENT -GUIDE INSTALLATION
Install guides on piping adjoining pipe expansion fittings and loops.
Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.
I_T�L�3:L�771�1�� �1�11i[�P►1
Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME 831.9 and
to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to
structure. Comply with ASME 831.9 and AWS D1.1.
220CT07 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING 220516 -3
AEC 27815
C. Construct concrete anchors of poured -in -place concrete of dimensions indicated and include
embedded fasteners.
D. Install pipe anchors according to expansion joint manufacturer's written instructions if expansion
joints are indicated.
E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors installed on or in
concrete.
END OF SECTION 220516
IE
K
220CT07 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING 220516 -4
AEC 27815
• •
0 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 220519
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Thermometers.
2. Gages.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL -CASE, LIQUID -IN -GLASS THERMOMETERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
B.
Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on
Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Palmer -Wahl Instruments Inc.
2. Trerice, H. O. Co.
3. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
4. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
C.
Case: Die -cast aluminum, 7 inches long.
D.
Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury filled, with magnifying lens.
E.
Tube Background: Satin - faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
F.
Window: Glass.
G.
Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with
locking device.
H.
Stem: Copper - plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit
installation.
I.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5
percent of range.
22OCT07 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 -1
AEC - 27815
D D
2.2 BIMETALLIC- ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
B. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on
Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
2. Tel -Tru Manufacturing Company.
3. Trerice, H. O. Co.
4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
5. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
6. WIKA Instrument Corporation.
C. Description: Direct - mounting, bimetallic - actuated dial thermometers complying with ASME 840.3.
D. Case: Liquid - filled type, stainless steel with 3 -inch diameter.
E. Element: Bimetal coil.
F. Dial: Satin- faced, nonreflecdive aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
G. Pointer: Red metal.
H. Window: Glass.
I. Ring: Stainless steel.
J. Connector: Adjustable angle type.
K. Stem: Metal, for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.
L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5
percent of range.
2.3 THERMOWELLS
A. Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used.
B. Description: Pressure - tight, socket -type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type,
diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.
2.4 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
B. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on
Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div.
2. Trerice, H. O. Co.
3. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
P]
22OCT07 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 -2
AEC - 27815
• •
C. Direct- Mounting, Dial -Type Pressure Gages: Indicating -dial type complying with ASME B40.100.
1. Case: Liquid - filled type, drawn steel or cast aluminum, 4-1/2 -inch diameter.
2. Pressure - Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom -outlet type unless back - outlet type is indicated.
4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
5. Dial: Satin faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
6. Pointer: Red metal.
7. Window: Glass.
8. Ring: Metal.
9. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale.
10. Vacuum - Pressure Range: 30-in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure.
11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.
D. Pressure -Gage Fittings:
1. Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless -steel needle type.
2. Snubbers: ASME 840.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion- resistant, porous -metal disc of
material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS
A. Install liquid -in -glass thermometers in the outlet of each domestic, hot -water storage tank.
B. Install liquid - filled -case -type, bimetallic - actuated dial thermometers at suction and discharge of each
pump.
C. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers:
Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 180 deg F, with 2- degree scale divisions.
Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2- degree scale divisions.
3.2 GAGE APPLICATIONS
A. Install dry-case -type pressure gages for discharge of each pressure- reducing valve.
B. Install liquid - filled -case -type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump.
3.3 INSTALLATIONS
A. Install direct- mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid and in vertical position in
piping tees where thermometers are indicated.
C. Install direct- mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most
readable position.
IV D. Install needle -valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage.
22OCT07 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 -3
AEC - 27815
E. Install thermometers and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance for thermometers, gages, machines, and equipment.
F. Adjust faces of thermometers and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
END OF SECTION 220519
Ic
R1
22OCT07 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 -4
AEC - 27815
0
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
SECTION 220523
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
A. This Section includes the following general -duty valves:
1. Copper -alloy ball valves.
2. Copper -alloy butterfly valves.
3. Bronze check valves.
4. Spring - loaded, lift -disc check valves.
5. Bronze gate valves.
6. Bronze globe valves.
B. See Division 21 fire- suppression piping and fire pump Sections for fire- protection valves.
C. See Division 22 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve
design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and
required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities;
furnished specialties; and accessories.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and design
criteria.
B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable -water service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
22OCT07 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 -1
AEC - 27815
OWN
2.2 VALVES, GENERAL
A. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.
B. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Valve Actuators:
1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter -turn types.
2. Lever Handle: For quarter -turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves.
G. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.
H. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast -iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and ASME 816.24
for bronze valves.
I. Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606.
1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
a. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check, gate, and
globe valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.
2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME 131.20.1.
J. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
2.3 COPPER -ALLOY BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. One - Piece, Copper -Alloy Ball Valves:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Grinnell Corporation.
e. Jamesbury, Inc.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2. Two - Piece, Copper -Alloy Ball Valves:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Flow -Tek, Inc.
e. Grinnell Corporation.
22OCT07 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
AEC - 27815
220523 -2
K
P]
1E
•
It
f. Hammond Valve.
g. Honeywell Braukmann.
h. Jamesbury, Inc.
I. Milwaukee Valve Company.
j. NIBCO INC.
k. Red -White Valve Corp.
I. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. Copper -Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP -110.
•
C. One - Piece, Copper -Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with chrome - plated bronze ball, PTFE
or TFE seats, and 400 -psig CWP rating.
D. Two - Piece, Copper -Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with full -port, chrome - plated bronze
ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600 -psig minimum CWP rating and blowout -proof stem.
2.4 COPPER -ALLOY BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Flangeless, Ferrous -Alloy Butterfly Valves:
0.)
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Center Line.
C. Grinnell Corporation.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Metraflex Co.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. Mueller Steam Specialty.
h. NIBCO INC.
i. Red -White Valve Corp.
j. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2. Single- Flange, Copper -Alloy Butterfly Valves:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
C. Grinnell Corporation.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Metraflex Co.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. Mueller Steam Specialty.
h. NIBCO INC.
L Red -White Valve Corp.
j. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. Copper -Alloy Butterfly Valves, General: MSS SP-67, Type I, for tight shutoff, with disc and lining
suitable for potable water, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flangeless, 150 -psig CWP Rating, Ferrous -Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one- or two-piece
stem.
D. Flangeless, 175 -psig CWP Rating, Ferrous -Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one- or two-piece
41 stem.
220CT07 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 -3
AEC - 27815
L W A
E
E. Flangeless, 200 -psig CWP Rating, Copper -Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one- or two -piece
stem.
F. Flangeless, 250 -psig CWP Rating, Copper -Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one- or two-piece
stem.
G. Single - Flange, 150 -psig CWP Rating, Copper -Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer -lug type with one- or
two-piece stem.
H. Single - Flange, 175 -psig CWP Rating, Copper -Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer -lug type with one- or
two-piece stem.
I. Single- Flange, 200 -psig CWP Rating, Copper -Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer -lug type with one- or
two -piece stem.
J. Single - Flange, 250 -psig CWP Rating, Copper -Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer -lug type with one- or
two -piece stem.
2.5 BRONZE CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type 1, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a. Cincinnati Valve Co.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Walworth Co. Ij
2. Type 2, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves with Metal Disc:
a. Cincinnati Valve Co.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Red -White Valve Corp.
3. Type 3, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Metal Disc:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Cincinnati Valve Co.
C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
e. Grinnell Corporation.
f. Hammond Valve.
g. Milwaukee Valve Company.
h. NIBCO INC.
i. Powell, Wm. Co.
j. Red -White Valve Corp.
k. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
I. Milwaukee Valve Company.
m. NIBCO INC.
n. Red -White Valve Corp.
o. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
PE
22OCT07 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 -4
AEC - 27815
C
B. Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP -80.
ti
r C. Type 3, Class 125, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat.
D. Type 3, Class 150, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat.
E. Type 3, Class 200, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat.
2.6 SPRING - LOADED, LIFT -DISC CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type I, Wafer Lift-Disc Check Valves:
a. Mueller Steam Specialty.
2. Type II, Compact-Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves:
a. Durabla Fluid Technology, Inc.
b. Flomatic Valves.
C. Grinnell Corporation.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Metraflex Co.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. Mueller Steam Specialty.
h. NIBCOINC.
3. Type III, Globe Lift-Disc Check Valves:
a. Durabla Fluid Technology, Inc.
b. Flomatic Valves.
C. Grinnell Corporation.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Metraflex Co.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. Multiplex Manufacturing Co.
h. NIBCO INC.
4. Type IV, Threaded Lift-Disc Check Valves:
a. Check -All Valve Mfg. Co.
b. Grinnell Corporation.
C. Metraflex Co.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company.
e. Mueller Steam Specialty.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. Lift -Disc Check Valves, General: FCI 74 -1, with spring - loaded bronze or alloy disc and bronze or
alloy seat.
C. Type I, Class 125, Wafer Lift-Disc Check Valves: Wafer style with cast -iron shell with diameter
matching companion flanges.
i s
22OCT07 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 -5
AEC - 27815
C•�
D. Type I, Class 250, Wafer Lift-Disc Check Valves: Wafer style with cast -iron shell with diameter
matching companion flanges. . j
E. Type II, Class 125, Compact-Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves: Compact -wafer style with cast -iron shell
with diameter made to fit within bolt circle.
F. Type II, Class 250, Compact-Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves: Compact -wafer style with cast -iron shell
with diameter made to fit within bolt circle.
G. Type III, Class 125, Globe Lift -Disc Check Valves: Globe style with cast-iron shell and flanged ends.
H. Type III, Class 250, Globe Lift -Disc Check Valves: Globe style with cast -iron shell and flanged ends.
I. Type IV, Class 125, Threaded Lift -Disc Check Valves: Threaded style with bronze shell and
threaded ends.
J. Type IV, Class 150, Threaded Lift -Disc Check Valves: Threaded style with bronze shell and
threaded ends.
2.7 BRONZE GATE VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type 1, Bronze, Nondsing -Stem Gate Valves:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Grinnell Corporation. Ij
e. Hammond Valve.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Red -White Valve Corp.
i. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2. Type 2, Bronze, Rising -Stem, Solid -Wedge Gate Valves:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
e. Grinnell Corporation.
f. Hammond Valve.
g. Milwaukee Valve Company.
h. NIBCO INC.
i. Powell, Wm. Co.
j. Red -White Valve Corp.
B. Bronze Gate Valves, General: MSS SP -80, with ferrous -alloy handwheel.
C. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solid wedge.
D. Type 1, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solid wedge.
220CT07 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 -6
AEC - 27815
0 9
7111
E. Type 1, Class 200, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solid wedge.
F. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge.
G. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge.
H. Type 2, Class 200, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge.
2.8 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type 1, Bronze Globe Valves with Metal Disc:
a.
Cincinnati Valve Co.
b.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
C.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d.
Grinnell Corporation.
e.
Hammond Valve.
f.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
g.
NIBCO INC.
h.
Red -White Valve Corp.
i.
Walworth Co.
2. Type 2, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
71-
L7
a. Cincinnati Valve Co.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Grinnell Corporation.
e. Hammond Valve.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Red -White Valve Corp.
B. Bronze Globe Valves, General: MSS SP -80, with ferrous -alloy handwheel.
C.
Type 1, Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves:
Bronze body with bronze disc.
D.
Type 1, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves:
Bronze body with bronze disc.
E.
Type 1, Class 200, Bronze Globe Valves:
Bronze body with bronze disc.
F.
Type 2, Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves:
Bronze body with PTFE or TFE disc.
G.
Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves:
Bronze body with PTFE or TFE disc.
H.
Type 2, Class 200, Bronze Globe Valves:
Bronze body with PTFE or TFE disc.
22OCT07 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
AEC - 27815
220523 -7
C
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated, use
the following:
1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, or gate valves.
2. Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly, or globe valves.
3. Pump Discharge: Spring - loaded, lift-disc check valves.
B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher CWP
ratings may be substituted.
C. Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:
1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: One - piece, 400 -psig CWP rating, copper alloy.
2. Ball Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy.
3. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Flanged, 150 -psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy, with
EPDM liner.
4. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 125, horizontal or vertical, bronze.
5. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 125, bronze.
6. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125, gray iron.
7. Wafer Check Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Single - plate, wafer, Class 125 or 150, ferrous
alloy.
8. Spring - Loaded, Lift -Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller. Type IV, Class 125 minimum.
9. Spring- Loaded, Lift -Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, cast iron.
10. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 1, Class 125, bronze.
11. Gate Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, OS &Y, bronze - mounted cast iron.
12. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 125, bronze.
13. Globe Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, bronze - mounted cast iron.
D. Sanitary Waste Piping: Use the following types of valves:
1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: One - piece, 400 -psig CWP rating, copper alloy.
2. Ball Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy.
3. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 3, Class 125, bronze.
4. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, gray iron.
5. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 1, Class 125, bronze.
6. Gate Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, OS &Y, bronze - mounted cast iron.
7. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 1, Class 125, bronze.
8. Globe Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, cast iron.
E. Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections:
1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder joint or threaded ends.
2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends.
3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.
5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends.
6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
J
22OCT07 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 -8
AEC - 27815
0
3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION
7*13
D.
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.
2. Dual -Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping joint construction.
B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according
to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water - flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free -alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 ADJUSTING
1. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
END OF SECTION 220523
A*
220CT07 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
AEC - 27815
220523 -9
1 I
x
F
Ic
• •
0, ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 220529
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Thermal- hanger shield inserts.
5. Fastener systems.
6. Equipment supports.
B. See Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural -steel shapes and plates for trapeze
hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
C. See Division 21 Section "Water -Based Fire - Suppression Systems" for pipe hangers for fire -
suppression piping.
D. See Division 22 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe guides and
anchors.
E. See Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for
vibration isolation devices.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP -90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems,
system contents, and test water.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
C. Design seismic- restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Thermal- hanger shield inserts.
22OCT07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 -1
AEC - 27815
O D
3. Powder- actuated fastener systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Equipment supports.
C.
1.5
A.
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Description: MSS SP -58, Types 1 through 58, factory- fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B. Manufacturers:
1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc.
2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
3. Empire Industries, Inc.
4. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
5. Grinnell Corp.
6. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
7. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
8. PHS Industries, Inc.
C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of
bearing surface of piping.
220CT07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 -2
AEC - 27815
0 •
2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field fabricated pipe - support assembly made from
structural -steel shapes with MSS SP -58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U- bolts.
2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Description: MFMA -3, shop- or field fabricated pipe - support assembly made of steel channels and
other components.
B. Manufacturers:
1. B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.
3. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
2.5
THERMAL - HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A.
Description: 100 -psig- minimum, compressive- strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal
shield.
B.
Manufacturers:
1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
3. Value Engineered Products, Inc.
C.
Insulation -Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water - repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
silicate with vapor barrier.
D.
Insulation -Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water - repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
silicate.
E.
For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
F.
For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
G.
Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air
temperature.
2.6
FASTENER SYSTEMS
A.
Powder - Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete
with pull -out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials
where used.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Hilti, Inc.
22OCT07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 -3
AEC - 27815
D �
b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
C. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
d. MKT Fastening, LLC.
e. Powers Fasteners.
B. Mechanical - Expansion Anchors: Insert- wedge -type zinc - coated steel, for use in hardened portiand
cement concrete with pull -out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
1. Manufacturers:
a. B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
b. Empire Industries, Inc.
C. Hilti, Inc.
d. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
e. MKT Fastening, LLC.
f. Powers Fasteners.
2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field - fabricated equipment support made from structural -steel shapes.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and - packaged, dry, hydraulic- cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and
equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping
system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not
have field - applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct
contact with copper tubing.
E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
22OCT07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
AEC - 27815
220529 -4
k'.
i
2
1E
IE
CJ
•
F. Horizontal- Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2.
Yoke -Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to
NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
3.
Carbon- or Alloy - Steel, Double -Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
4.
Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
5.
U -Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
6.
Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe
base stanchion support and cast -iron floor flange.
7.
Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2 rods if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
8.
Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal
movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not
necessary.
G. Vertical- Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20.
2. Carbon- or Alloy -Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser damps.
H. Hanger -Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe
hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top -Beam C- Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side -Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4. Center -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are
considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C- Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Welded -Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by
using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
C. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 Ib.
4D 8. Side -Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
22OCT07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 -5
AEC - 27815
J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections,
install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe - Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation
that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to
prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal- Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1 -1/4
inches.
2. Spring- Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs.
3. Variable -Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.
L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
M. Comply with MFMA -102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified
in piping system Sections.
N. Use powder - actuated fasteners or mechanical- expansion anchors instead of building attachments
where required in concrete construction.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION 1J
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP -89. Install hangers, supports,
clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.
B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP -89. Arrange for grouping
of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field- fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install
intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe
hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field - assembled metal framing systems.
D. Thermal- Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
E. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder- actuated fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Use operators that are licensed by powder - actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder- actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical- expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F]
22OCT07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 -6
AEC - 27815
0 •
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other
accessories.
G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded- structural -steel shapes.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to
permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,
expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2 -1/2 and larger
and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten
inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe
deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.
M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach damps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal- hanger shield insert
with damp sized to match OD of insert.
C. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP -58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated.
Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
3. Install MSS SP -58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall
span an arc of 180 degrees.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 -1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
C. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Indude wood inserts.
6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal- Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural -steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
22OCT07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 -7
AEC - 27815
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop
welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of
welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with
SSPC -PA 1 requirements for touching up field- painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing -
repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 220529
1b]
P]
F`
220CT07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 -8
AEC - 27815
0
n k
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
VIBRATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1. Isolation pads.
2. Isolation mounts.
3. Housed spring mounts.
4. Elastomeric hangers.
5. Spring hangers.
6. Spring hangers with vertical -limit stops.
7. Pipe riser resilient supports.
8. Resilient pipe guides.
1.2
A.
B.
;7
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each product indicated.
Welding certificates.
C. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
D. Field quality- control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SECTION 220548
A. Comply with seismic - restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more
stringent.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding
Code - Steel."
C. Seismic - restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear
anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproved by ICC -ES, or preapproved by
another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic - restraint
ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If
preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred.
Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic - restraint designs must
be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
220CT07 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING
AEC - 27815
0
220548 -1
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
C. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on
Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.
2. Amber /Booth Company, Inc.
3. California Dynamics Corporation.
4. Isolation Technology, Inc.
5. Kinetics Noise Control.
6. Mason Industries.
7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
8. Vibration Isolation.
9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
D. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area,
molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized -steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match
requirements of supported equipment.
1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water- resistant neoprene.
E. Mounts: Double- deflection type, with molded, oil- resistant rubber, hermetically sealed compressed
fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory- drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to
equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate
capacity range.
1. Materials: Cast - ductile -iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing,
oil- resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and
attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.
2. Neoprene: Shock - absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge -
bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
F. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open- spring isolators.
1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at
rated load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation
or failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4 -inch- thick, rubber
isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig.
6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to
fasten and level equipment.
7. or failure.
G. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers.
IE
IE
IE
22OCT07 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220548 -2
AEC - 27815
• •
1. Housing: Ductile -iron or steel housing to provide all - directional seismic restraint.
2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.
3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4 -inch travel up or down before
contacting a resilient collar.
H. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double- deflection type, fitted with molded, oil- resistant elastomeric
isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color -code
or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
Spring Hangers: Combination coil- spring and elastomeric -insert hanger with spring and insert in
compression.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum
of 30 degrees of angular hanger -rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation
efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at
rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation
or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil- resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel- washer - reinforced cup
to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
7. Self- centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring
coil.
J. Spring Hangers with Vertical -Limit Stop: Combination coil- spring and elastomeric -insert hanger with
spring and insert in compression and with a vertical -limit stop.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum
of 30 degrees of angular hanger -rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation
efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at
rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation
or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil - resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up -stop" on lower threaded
rod.
8. Self- centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring
coil.
K. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: AII- directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes
separated by a minimum of 1/2 -inch- thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical -limit stops
arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the
isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions.
L. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement
separated by a minimum of 1/2 -inch- thick neoprene. Where dearances are not readily visible, a
factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and
contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of
pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.
0
22OCT07 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220548 -3
AEC - 27815
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an
evaluation service member of ICC -ES.
B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to
receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.
C. Strength of Support and Seismic - Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to cant' present and future static and seismic loads within
specified loading limits.
3.2 VIBRATION- CONTROL AND SEISMIC - RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Restraints:
1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between
anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inches.
2. Install seismic - restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of
ICC -ES providing required submittals for component.
B. Piping Restraints:
1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP -127.
2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80
feet o.c.
3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.
C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
D. Install seismic- restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of [CC-
ES providing required submittals for component.
E. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor - mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient
media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at
flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
G. Drilled -in Anchors:
OWN
FJ
P]
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for
anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling.
Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered
during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications
conduit, and gas lines.
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full
design strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy -duty sleeve
anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor
is to be fastened.
4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
22OCT07 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220548 -4
AEC - 27815
0 0
n*
5. Install zinc - coated steel anchors for interior and stainless steel anchors for exterior
applications.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to
restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least
seven days' advance notice.
3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary
load- spreading members.
4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by
Architect.
5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
6. Measure isolator restraint clearance.
7. Measure isolator deflection.
8. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results
are achieved.
C]
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After
equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal
operation.
C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
1. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
END OF SECTION 220548
220CT07 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING
AEC - 27815
220548 -5
05
C
E
PE
0 0
!3*
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 220553
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING & EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
1.2 SUBMITTAL
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032 -inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or
stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2 -1/2
by 3/4 inch.
3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2
inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater
viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three - fourths the size of principal
lettering.
4. Fasteners: Stainless -steel rivets or self - tapping screws.
5. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16
inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: Black.
3. Background Color: White.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2 -1/2
by 3/4 inch.
6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2
inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater
viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three - fourths the size of principal
lettering.
220CT07 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220553 -1
AEC - 27815 & EQUIPMENT
0
7. Fasteners: Stainless -steel rivets or self - tapping screws.
8. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing
numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section
number and title where equipment is specified.
D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8- 1/2 -by -11 -inch bond
paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is
indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where
equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch
thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: Black.
C. Background Color: White.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2 -1/2 by 3/4
inch.
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch
for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing
distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three - fourths the size of principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless -steel rivets or self- tapping screws.
H. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.
2.3 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color- coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and
to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self- Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact -type, permanent- adhesive backing.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow- Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1 -1/2 inches high.
22OCT07 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220553 -2
AEC - 27815 & EQUIPMENT
C�
PART 3 - EXECUTION
7*11
7 1
3.1 PREPARATION
•
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices,
including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Piping Color- Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section 'Interior Painting."
B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine
rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed
locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where
flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas
of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1. Domestic Water Piping:
a. Background Color: White.
b. Letter Color: Black.
2. Sanitary Waste Piping:
a. Background Color: White.
b. Letter Color: Black.
END OF SECTION 220553
220CT07 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING
AEC - 27815 & EQUIPMENT
220553 -3
I ]
L
E
• •
I
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1. Insulation Materials:
D
f_0
a. Cellular glass.
b. Flexible elastomeric.
C. Mineral fiber.
d. Polyolefin.
e. Polystyrene.
2. Insulating cements.
3. Adhesives.
4. Mastics.
5. Sealants.
6. Factory- applied jackets.
7. Field - applied fabric - reinforcing mesh.
8. Field - applied jackets.
9. Tapes.
10. Securements.
11. Corner angles.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 21 Section "Fire- Suppression Systems Insulation."
2. Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."
SECTION 220700
PLUMBING INSULATION
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.
3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of
insulation.
5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels.
6. Detail application of field- applied jackets.
7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
8. Detail field application for each equipment type.
220CT07
AEC - 27815
PLUMBING INSULATION
220700 -1
C. Field quality - control reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire- test - response
characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and
jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors:
50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors
of 150 or less.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
Flame- spread index of 25 or less, and smoke - developed index of
Flame- spread index of 75 or less, and smoke - developed index
A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to
ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,
hermetically sealed cells. Factory- applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory- Applied
Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Cell -U -Foam Corporation; Ultra -CUF.
b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.
2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.
3. Special- Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1.
6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory- Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,
Class 2.
7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed -cell, sponge- or expanded- rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
IE
1-
22OCT07 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -2
AEC - 27815
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.
b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
C. RBX Corporation; Insul -Sheet 1800 and Insul -Tube 180.
H. High - Temperature, Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type V, without factory- applied jacket.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Johns Manville; HTB 23 Spin -Glas.
b. Owens Corning; High Temperature Flexible Batt Insulations.
High - Temperature, Mineral -Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type III, without factory- applied jacket.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.
b. Johns Manville; 1000 Series Spin -Glas.
C. Owens Corning; High Temperature Industrial Board Insulations.
d. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta Board.
e. Roxul Inc.; Roxul RW.
f. Thermafiber; Thermafiber Industrial Felt.
J. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
l 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
b. Johns Manville; Micro -Lok.
C. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley -K.
e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
2. Type 1, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A,with factory- applied ASJ. Factory- applied jacket
requirements are specified in "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article.
K. Mineral- Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Semirigid board material with factory- applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA
Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or
more. Thermal conductivity (k- value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in. /h x sq. ft. x deg F or less.
Factory- applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap.
b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex.
C. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex.
e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.
22OCT07 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -3
AEC - 27815
L. Polystyrene: Rigid, extruded cellular polystyrene intended for use as thermal insulation. Comply
with ASTM C 578, Type IV or Type X111, except thermal conductivity (k- value) shall not exceed 0.26
Btu x in. /h x sq. ft. x deg F after 180 days of aging. Fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and
ASTM C 585. 4
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam.
b. Knauf Insulation; Knauf Polystyrene.
2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral- Fiber, Hydraulic- Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote.
b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik -Cote.
C. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Cellular -Glass Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent -based resin adhesive, with a service temperature
range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -96.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81 -33.
C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A- 24179A, Type II, Class I.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.
b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.
C. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75.
d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.
D. Mineral -Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A- 3316C, Class 2, Grade A-
1 . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S- 90/80.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22 -25.
22OCT07 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -4
AEC - 27815
•
E. Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent- or water- based, synthetic resin adhesive with a service temperature
range of minus 20 to plus 140 deg F.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -96.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 97 -13.
F. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A- 3316C, Class 2, Grade A
for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S- 90/80.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22 -25.
G. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone.
b. Johns - Manville; Zeston Perma -Weld, CEEL -TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.
C. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.
d. Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear.
e. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive.
i
2.4 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL -C-
19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor- Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -35.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90.
C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB -50.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590.
e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40.
f. Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43 -mil dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
0 a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -10.
22OCT07 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -5
AEC - 27815
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 35-00.
C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB- 05/15.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 550.
e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50.
f. Vimasco Corporation; WC- 1/WC -5.
2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625 -inch dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F.
4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
2.5 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
Joint Sealants for Cellular -Glass Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45.
C. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 44 -05.
e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.
f. Vimasco Corporation; 750.
2. Joint Sealants for Polystyrene Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -70.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30- 45/30 -46.
C. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 4405.
e. Vimasco Corporation; 750.
3. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
4. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
5. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.
6. Color: White or gray.
B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76 -8.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44.
C. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 44 -05.
e. Vimasco Corporation; 750.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fire- and water- resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
5. Color: Aluminum.
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: vi
22OCT07 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -6
AEC - 27815
i
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
0
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fire- and water- resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
5. Color: White.
2.6 FACTORY - APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory- applied jackets on various applications. When factory-
applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft- paper, fiberglass- reinforced scrim with aluminum foil backing; complying
with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2. ASJ -SSL: ASJ with self- sealing, pressure - sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum foil, fiberglass - reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying
with ASTM C 1136, Type 11.
4. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film
with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame -
spread index of 5 and a smoke - developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
I*
1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560
Vapor Retarder Film.
5. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6 -mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film
with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame -
spread index of 5 and a smoke - developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560
Vapor Retarder Film.
6. PVDC -SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self - sealing, pressure- sensitive, acrylic -based
adhesive covered by a removable protective strip.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560
Vapor Retarder Film.
2.7 FIELD - APPLIED FABRIC - REINFORCING MESH
A. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz. /sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10
strands/sq. inch, in a Leno weave, for equipment and pipe.
22OCT07 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -7
AEC - 27815
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; Mast -A -Fab.
b. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.
2.8 FIELD - APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field- applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. PVC Jacket: High - impact- resistant, UV- resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354 -
C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is
indicated in field - applied jacket schedules.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Johns Manville; Zeston.
b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.
C. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.
d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
3. Color: White.
4. Factory- fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.
a. Shapes: 45- and 90- degree, short- and long- radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,
unions, reducers, end caps, soil -pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P -trap and
supply covers for lavatories.
5. Factory- fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.
C. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H -14.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems.
b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit.
C. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul -Mate.
2. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.
3. Finish and thickness are indicated in field- applied jacket schedules.
4. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1 -mil- thick, heat - bonded polyethylene and kraft
paper.
5. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat - bonded polyethylene and kraft
paper.
6. Factory- Fabricated Fitting Covers:
a. Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
b. Preformed 2 -piece or gore, 45- and 90- degree, short- and long- radius elbows.
C. Tee covers.
d. Flange and union covers.
e. End caps.
f. Beveled collars.
g. Valve covers.
h. Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory fabricated fitting covers are not available.
220CTO7 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -8
AEC - 27815
0
2.9 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor- retarder tape matching factory- applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835.
b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.
C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.
d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces forcelinch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibfrnch in width.
7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil -face, vapor- retarder tape matching factory- applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827.
b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111.
C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK.
d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW /SQ.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 6.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf/inch in width.
7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C. PVC Tape: White vapor- retarder tape matching field - applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive.
Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555.
b. Compac Corp.; 130.
C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape.
d. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.
2. Width: 2 inches.
3. Thickness: 6 mils.
4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 500 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 18 Ibfrnch in width.
D. Aluminum -Foil Tape: Vapor- retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
22OCT07 PLUMBING INSULATION
AEC - 27815
220700 -9
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800.
b. Compac Corp.; 120.
C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF.
d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.
2. Width: 2 inches.
3. Thickness: 3.7 mils.
4. Adhesion: 100 ounces forcerinch in width.
5. Elongation: 5 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 34 Ibf /inch in width.
E. PVDC Tape: White vapor- retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Tape.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Film Thickness: 4 mils.
4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils.
5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 55 Ibf /inch in width.
2.10 SECUREMENTS
A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H -14, 0.020 inch thick,
1/2 inch wide with wing or dosed seal.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Childers Products; Bands.
b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands.
C. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.
B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to
projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in
position indicated when self - locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul- Hangers, Series T.
2) GEMCO; Perforated Base.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.
b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches
square.
C. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106 -inch- diameter
shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging
insulation, hangers, and substrates.
22OCT07 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -10
AEC - 27815
0 •
2. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to
projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in
position indicated when self - locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1) GEMCO; Nylon Hangers.
2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers.
b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1 -1/2 inches in diameter.
C. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106 -inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated,
up to 2 -1/2 inches.
d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging
insulation, hangers, and substrates.
3. Self- Sticking -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable
of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self - locking
washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul- Hangers, Series TSA.
2) GEMCO; Press and Peel.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick.
b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
C. Spindle: Copper- or zinc - coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106 -inch- diameter
shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
d. Adhesive - backed base with a peel -off protective cover.
4. Insulation- Retaining Washers: Self - locking washers formed from 0.016 -inch- thick,
galvanized -steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in
place but not less than 1 -1/2 inches in diameter.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC -150.
2) GEMCO; R -150.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA -150.
4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.
b. Protect ends with capped self - locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
5. Nonmetal Insulation- Retaining Washers: Self - locking washers formed from 0.016 -inch- thick
nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not
less than 1 -1/2 inches in diameter.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1) GEMCO.
2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.
22OCT07 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -11
AEC - 27815
C. Staples: Outward - clinching insulation staples, nominal 314- inch - wide, stainless steel or Monel.
D. Wire: 0.080 -inch nickel- copper alloy.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. C & F Wire.
b. Childers Products.
C. PABCO Metals Corporation.
d. RPR Products, Inc.
2.11 CORNER ANGLES
A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354 -C. White or color -coded to match adjacent surface.
B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to
ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H -14.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for
heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless -steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free
of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for
each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry
state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, dips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
220CT07 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -12
AEC - 27815
0 0
7
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive
recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor - barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs
from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal
ends at attachment to structure with vapor- barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material
manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and
dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory- applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3- inch - wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4
inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1 -1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal
seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self- sealing lap. Staple laps with
outward cinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor- barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to
maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor- barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
E*
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to
thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend
patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt
joints.
P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration - control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
22OCT07
AEC - 27815
PLUMBING INSULATION
220700 -13
3.3 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and
seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install
insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint
sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof
flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with
sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously
through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and
seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install
insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint
sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2
inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install
insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E. Insulation Installation at Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously
through penetrations of fire -rated walls and partitions.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping "irestopping and
fire- resistive joint sealers.
F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
2. Seal penetrations through fire -rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07
Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific
requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor- retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same
material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against
adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces
22OCT07 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -14
AEC - 27815
0 •
9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size
and color of pipe labels.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test
connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and
equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with
insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness
as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from
flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation
on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless -steel or aluminum
bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the
two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered
blocks wired to stainless -steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to
flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each
side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating
cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is
dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field- applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces
with a metal jacket.
D*1
22OCT07 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -15
AEC - 27815
with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with
adjoining pipe insulation.
3.
Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with be wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
4.
Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material,
density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less
than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For
valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing -box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill
joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.
5.
Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation
by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is
thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so
strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the
insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient
services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.
6.
Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap
adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one
pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7.
Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic.
Install vapor- barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above
ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric - reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a
smooth and well- shaped contour.
8.
For services not specified to receive a field- applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and
polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions.
Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using
PVC tape.
9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size
and color of pipe labels.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test
connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and
equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with
insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness
as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from
flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation
on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless -steel or aluminum
bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the
two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered
blocks wired to stainless -steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to
flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each
side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating
cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is
dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field- applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces
with a metal jacket.
D*1
22OCT07 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -15
AEC - 27815
05
3.5 CELLULAR -GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION
K
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming
insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with
vapor - barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory- applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory- applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor- barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular -glass block insulation of same
thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Install jacket .material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1
inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular -
glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of cellular -glass insulation to valve body.
2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing
insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as
pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
R1
22OCT07 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -16
AEC - 27815
0 •
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve
operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being
insulated.
3.7 MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands
without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with
vapor - barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory- applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory- applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor- barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral -fiber blanket insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1
inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of
pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials
with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
220CT07 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -17
AEC - 27815
D G�
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve
body.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing
insulation.
4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.8 POLYSTYRENE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of insulation with tape or bands and tighten bands without deforming
insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in 3 and 9 o'clock
positions on the pipe.
2. For insulation with factory- applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal tabs
but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer and seal with vapor - barrier mastic.
3. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints. Vapor barrier must
be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor- barrier system.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, same thickness of
adjacent pipe insulation, not to exceed 1 -1/2 -inch thickness.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polystyrene block insulation of same
thickness as pipe insulation.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
Install preformed insulation sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation.
Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed section of polystyrene insulation to valve body.
2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing
insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.9 FIELD - APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Install jacket with 1 -1/2 -inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3- inch - wide joint strips at end
joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor- retarder jackets and exposed insulation with
vapor- barrier mastic.
F .
220CT07 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -18
AEC - 27815
B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for
horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels.
Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the
finish bead along seam and joint edge.
C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2 -inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints.
Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant
recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless -steel bands 12 inches o.c.
and at end joints.
D. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to
pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket.
2. Wrap factory- presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end
overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap
at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and
then apply 1 -1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint.
3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive
or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to
manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to
maintain a permanent bond.
4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an
outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches or less. The 33 -1/2- inch - circumference limit allows for
2 -inch- overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed
at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and
use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint.
5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and
wrapping a minimum of 1 -1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.
3.10 FINISHES
A. Equipment and Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint
system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and
finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex - emulsion size.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation
manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of
the completed Work.
D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless -steel jackets.
22OCT07 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -19
AEC - 27815
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect field -insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field- applied
jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall
be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation
Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine
compliance.
2. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field -
applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection
shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three
locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded
strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each
pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements.
3.12 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a
type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated.
C. Heat - Exchanger (Water- to-Water for Domestic Water Heating Service) Insulation: Mineral -Fiber 11 4)
Pipe and Tank: 2 inches thick.
D. Domestic water, domestic chilled -water (potable), and domestic hot -water hydropneumatic tank
insulation shall be the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
2. Mineral -Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1 inch thick.
3. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick.
E. Domestic Hot-Water Storage Tank Insulation: Mineral -Fiber Pipe and Tank: 4 inches thick.
F. Piping System Filter- Housing Insulation: Mineral -Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches thick.
3.13 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each
piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection
from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
2. Underground piping.
P1
22OCT07 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -20
AEC - 27815
0 •
3.14 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: Insulation shall be one of the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
2. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
3. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick.
B. Domestic Chilled Water (Potable): Insulation shall be one of the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
2. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
3. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick.
C. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for
People with Disabilities: Insulation shall be one of the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
2. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
3. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick.
END OF SECTION 220700
!1A
220CT07 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 -21
AEC - 27815
G �
E
F.
• •
EV
n
E *
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes domestic water piping inside the building.
B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company.
C. See Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers, pressure gages,
and fittings.
D. See Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for water distribution piping specialties.
A. Field quality - control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials," for plastic,
potable domestic water piping and components.
B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9,"
for potable domestic water piping and components.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Pipe and Fitting Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting the
same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
SECTION 221116
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME 816.18, cast- copper -alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought -
copper, solder joint fittings. Furnish wrought - copper fittings if indicated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder joint ends. Furnish Class 300 flanges
if required to match piping.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP -123, cast- copper- alloy, hexagonal -stock body, with ball- and - socket,
metal -to -metal seating surfaces, and solder joint or threaded ends.
22OCT07
AEC - 27815
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 -1
G O
D. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast- copper -alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought -
copper, solder -joint fittings. Furnish wrought - copper fittings if indicated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME 816.24, Class 150, with solder -joint ends. Furnish Class 300 flanges
if required to match piping.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP -123, cast- copper- alloy, hexagonal -stock body, with ball- and - socket,
metal- to-metal seating surfaces, and solder joint or threaded ends.
E. AQUA PEX Tube: ASTM F876 and F877 and NSF Standard 14 & 61.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast- copper -alloy or
ASME 816.22, wrought- copper, solder joint fittings. Furnish wrought -
copper fittings if indicated.
2.2 VALVES
A. Bronze and cast -iron, general -duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General -Duty Valves
for Plumbing Piping."
B. Balancing and drain valves are specked in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION 4
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3.2 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in
applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fitting Option: Extruded -tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper
tubing.
D. Under - Building -Slab, Water - Service Piping on Service Side of Water Meter: Refer to Division 22
Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping."
E. Domestic Water Piping on Service Side of Water Meter inside the Building: Use the following piping
materials for each size range:
1. NPS 4 to NPS 6: Steel pipe; gray -iron, threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
F. Under - Building -Slab, Domestic Water Piping on House Side of Water Meter, NPS 4 and Smaller:
Hard copper tube, Type M; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
J
22OCT07 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 -2
AEC - 27815
• 0
G
3.3
A.
D
Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range:
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
2. NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 6: Steel pipe; gray -iron, threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
VALVE APPLICATIONS
Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following
requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast -iron
butterfly or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger.
2. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast -iron
butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger.
3. Hot - Water- Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.
4. Drain Duty: Hose -end drain valves.
B. Install shutoff valve dose to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or
equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that
do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or
gate valves for piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger.
C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and
where required to drain water piping.
1. Install hose -end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2. Install stop -and -waste drain valves where indicated.
D. Install balancing valve in each hot -water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump
and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball valves for
piping NPS 2 and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger. Balancing valves are
specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
E. Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot -water circulation return branch and discharge side of
each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow.
Calibrated balancing valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results
for Plumbing."
B. Install under - building -slab copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C. Install cast -iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration
through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation
watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common
Work Results for Plumbing."
D. Install shutoff valve, hose -end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the
building at each domestic water service entrance. Pressure gages are specified in Division 22
Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping," and drain valves and strainers are specified in
Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
22OCT07 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 -3
AEC - 27815
C
E. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.
F. Rough -in domestic water piping for water -meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
Results for Plumbing."
B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water - flushable, lead -free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Extruded -Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool designed
for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze
branch tube into collar.
3.6 ROUGHING -IN FOR WATER METERS
A. Rough -in domestic water piping for water meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility.
3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Pipe hanger and support devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, damps.
2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel devis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
C. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls, if indicated.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double -rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.
E. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1. NPS 1 -1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
2. NPS 1 -1/2: 108 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8 -inch rod.
220CT07 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 -4
AEC - 27815
• .
4. NPS 2 -1/2: 11 feet with 1/2 -inch rod.
5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2: 12 feet with 1/2 -inch rod.
6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8 -inch rod.
F. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.
G. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1. NPS 314 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
2. NPS 1 and NPS 1 -1/4: 72 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
3. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
4. NPS 2 -1/2: 108 inches with 1/2 -inch rod.
5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2 -inch rod.
H. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
B. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water- service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar
piping materials.
C. Connect domestic water piping to water- service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and connect to
the following:
1. Water Heaters: Cold -water supply and hot -water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot -water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code.
3. Equipment: Cold- and hot -water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment
connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of
unions for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:
a. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing -in
after roughing -in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe
tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
�74
22OCT07 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 -5
AEC - 27815
O c�
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Test domestic water piping as follows:
1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and
that piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each
test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it
was tested.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without
exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand
for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping using purging and disinfecting procedures
prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if
biological examination shows contamination.
C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
END OF SECTION 221116
PC
220CT07 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 -6
AEC - 27815
i
0 ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS SECTION 221119
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:
1. Vacuum breakers.
2. Backflow preventers.
3. Water pressure - reducing valves.
4. Balancing valves.
5. Strainers.
6. Drain valves.
7. Water hammer arresters.
8. Pro Set trap Guards.
B.
See Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters.
C.
See Division 22 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers" for water filters for water coolers.
D.
See Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Filtration Equipment" for water filters in domestic water
piping.
1.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality - control test reports.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS
A. Pipe - Applied, Atmospheric -Type Vacuum Breakers:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
220CT07 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 -1
AEC - 27815
a. Ames Co.
b. Cash Acme.
C. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
d. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
3. Standard: ASSE 1001.
4. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping.
5. Body: Bronze.
6. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.
7. Finish: Rough bronze.
B. Hose- Connection Vacuum Breakers:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc.
b. Cash Acme.
C. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
d. Woodford Manufacturing Company.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
3. Standard: ASSE 1001.
4. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.
5. Outlet Connection: Garden -hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.
6. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.
2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Intermediate Atmospheric -Vent Backflow Preventers:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Cash Acme.
b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
C. Honeywell Water Controls.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
3. Standard: ASSE 1012.
4. Operation: Continuous - pressure applications.
5. Size: NPS 3/4.
6. Body: Bronze.
7. End Connections: Union, solder joint.
8. Finish: Chrome plated.
9.
220CT07 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 -2
AEC - 27815
•
U
B. Reduced- Pressure - Principle Backflow Preventers:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Ames Co.
b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
C. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
4. Standard: ASSE 1013.
5. Operation: Continuous- pressure applications.
6. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
7. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger.
8. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow.
9. Accessories:
a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller; outside
screw and yoke gate -type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 -1/2 and larger.
b. Air -Gap Fitting: ASME Al 12.1.2, matching backflow- preventer connection.
C. Double -Check Backflow Prevention Assemblies:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Ames Co.
b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
C. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
4. Standard: ASSE 1015.
5. Operation: Continuous- pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
7. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550
or that is FDA approved for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger.
8. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger.
9. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow.
10. Accessories:
a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller; outside
screw and yoke gate -type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 -1/2 and larger.
D. Backflow - Preventer Test Kits:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
220CT07 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 -3
AEC - 27815
3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
C. Flomatic Corporation.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
4. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test -
procedure instructions.
2.3 WATER PRESSURE - REDUCING VALVES
A. Water Regulators:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Cash Acme.
b. Honeywell Water Controls.
C. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
F]
3. Standard: ASSE 1003.
4. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig.
5. Body: Bronze with chrome - plated finish for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining
complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2 -1/2 and NPS 3.
6. Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass.
7. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2 -1/2 and NPS 3.
2.4 BALANCING VALVES
A. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
C. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Milwaukee Valve Company.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Red -White Valve Corp.
3. Standard: MSS SP -110 for two - piece, copper -alloy ball valves.
4. Pressure Rating: 400 -psig minimum CWP.
5. Size: NPS 2 or smaller.
6. Body: Copper alloy.
22OCT07 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 -4
AEC - 27815
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
• .
Port: Standard or full port.
Ball: Chrome - plated brass.
Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
End Connections: Solder joint or threaded.
Handle: Vinyl- covered steel with memory- setting device.
2.5 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A. Y- Pattern Strainers:
1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550
or FDA - approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger.
3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger.
4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Perforation Size:
a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.020 inch.
b. Strainers NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: 0.045 inch.
C. Strainers NPS 5 and Larger: 0.10 inch.
6. Drain: Factory- installed, hose -end drain valve.
2.6 DRAIN VALVES
A. Ball -Valve -Type, Hose -End Drain Valves:
1.
Standard: MSS SPA 10 for standard -port, two -piece ball valves.
2.
Pressure Rating: 400 -psig minimum CWP.
3.
Size: NPS 3/4.
4.
Body: Copper alloy.
5.
Ball: Chrome - plated brass.
6.
Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
7.
Handle: Vinyl- covered steel.
8.
Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
9.
Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden -hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and
cap with brass chain.
2.7 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Water Hammer Arresters:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. AMTROL, Inc.
b. Josam Company.
C. MIFAB, Inc.
d. PPP Inc.
e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
22OCT07 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 -5
AEC - 27815
g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
h. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
3. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI WH 201.
4. Type: Metal bellows.
5. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI -WH 201, Sizes A through F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint
construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other
equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.
2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric -vent drain connection with air -gap fitting,
fixed air -gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in
drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air -gap device attached to or under backflow
preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.
3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
C. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
D. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.
E. Install temperature - actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with
shutoff valve on outlet.
1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified.
2. Install cabinet -type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.
F. Install Y- pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve, water pressure- reducing
valve, solenoid valve, and pump.
G. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI -WH 201.
H. Install supply -type, trap -seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a
minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor -drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper
flow.
I. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping and specialties.
Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic - laminate equipment nameplate or sign
on or near each of the following:
1. Intermediate atmospheric -vent backflow preventers.
2. Reduced- pressure - principle backflow preventers.
3. Double -check backflow-prevention assemblies.
220CT07 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 -6
AEC - 27815
• •
D
4. Water pressure - reducing valves.
5. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves.
6. Supply -type, trap -seal primer valves.
K. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and
emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit.
Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:
1. Test each reduced- pressure- principle backflow preventer and double -check backflow
prevention assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference
standard.
7
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Set field- adjustable pressure set points of water pressure- reducing valves.
B. Set field- adjustable flow of balancing valves.
C. Set field- adjustable temperature set points of temperature - actuated water mixing valves.
END OF SECTION 221119
f #11
220CT07 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
AEC - 27815
221119 -7
IE
E
0 S
A
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
LANDMARK CONDOMINIUMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
SECTION 221123
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
A. This Section includes the following all- bronze and bronze - fitted centrifugal pumps for domestic hot -
water circulation:
1. Close - coupled, in -line pumps and wet rotor circulators.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic water pump specified. Include certified
performance curves with operating points plotted on curves; and rated capacities of selected models,
furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
0 ';
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor - operated water pumps.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
22OCT07
AEC - 27815
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
221123 -1
2.2 CLOSE - COUPLED, IN -LINE PUMPS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong Pumps Inc.
2. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Industries.
3. Grundfos Pumps Corp.
4. Taco, Inc.
B. Description: Factory- assembled and - tested, single- stage, close - coupled, in-line, sealless centrifugal
pumps as defined in HI 5.1 -5.6.
1. Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed, replaceable- cartridge -type unit with motor
and impeller on common shaft and designed for installation with pump and motor shaft
mounted horizontally.
2. Casing: Bronze, with threaded companion -flange connections.
3. Impeller: Corrosion - resistant material.
4. Motor: Single speed, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 22
Section "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."
2.3 CONTROLS
A. Timers: Electric time clock for control of hot -water circulation pumps.
Manufacturers:
a. Honeywell International, Inc.
b. Intermatic, Inc.
C. Johnson Controls, Inc.
d. Maple Chase Company.
e. TORK.
2. Type: Programmable, seven -day clock with manual override on-off switch.
3. Enclosure: Suitable for wall mounting.
4. Operation of Pump: On or off.
5. Transformer: Provide if required.
6. Power Requirement: 24 V, ac.
7. Programmable Sequence of Operation: Up to two on -off cycles each day for seven days.
8. Power Requirement: 24 V, ac.
9. Programmable Sequence of Operation: Limit pump operation to periods of burner operation
plus maximum five minutes after the burner stops.
2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Anamet, Inc.
2. Flex -Hose Co., Inc.
3. Flexicraft Industries.
4. Flex - Pression, Ltd.
5. Flex -Weld, Inc.
6. Mercer Rubber.
7. Metraflex, Inc.
8. Unaflex Inc.
22OCT07 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 221123 -2
AEC - 27815
• •
A,
D
B. Description: Corrugated, bronze inner tubing covered with bronze wire braid. Include copper -tube
ends or bronze flanged ends, braze - welded to tubing. Include 125 -psig minimum working- pressure
rating and ends matching pump connections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with HI 1.4.
B. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers,
couplings, and accessories.
C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight
of pumps is not supported by piping.
D. Install in-line centrifugal pumps with motor and pump shafts horizontal.
E. Install continuous- thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers of sufficient size Mechanical
Vibration to support pump weight. Vibration isolation devices are specified in Division 22 Section
'Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Fabricate brackets or supports
as required. Hanger and support materials are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and
Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
F. Piping installation requirements are specked in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.
H. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater
than size of pump nozzles. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping."
1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping of dose - coupled,
horizontally mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps.
2. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of pumps, and check valve and throttling
valve on discharge side of pumps. Install valves same size as connected piping. Refer to
Division 22 Section "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general -duty valves for
domestic water piping and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for
strainers.
3. Install pressure gages at suction and discharge of pumps. Install at integral pressure -gage
tappings where provided or install pressure -gage connectors in suction and discharge piping
around pumps. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for
pressure gages and gage connectors.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
u
K. Interlock pump with water heater burner and time delay relay.
END OF SECTION 221123
220CT07 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
AEC - 27815
221123 -3
KNM
PE
K
r: